Nissan 2016 Versa Note Owners Manual | Owner's USA

2015-10-24

: Nissan Nissan-2016-Nissan-Versa-Note-Owners-Manual-818564 nissan-2016-nissan-versa-note-owners-manual-818564 nissan pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 400 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2016 Nissan Versa Note Owner's Manual
OM16EM 0E12U0
Table of Contents

2016 VERSA NOTE

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2016 NISSAN VERSA NOTE E12-D

E12-D

'16

Printing : June 2015

Publication No.: 0C11U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM16EM 0E12U0

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide” explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, and clarify your

rights under your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any ques-

tions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed by NISSAN or by a NISSAN

dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

cautions and instructions concerning proper use

of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for de-

tails concerning the particular accessories with

which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability and may

even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance prob-

lems resulting from modifications may

not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of print-

ing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifi-

cations, performance, design or component sup-

pliers without notice and without obligation. From

time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this

manual to provide Owners with the most accurate

information currently available. Please carefully

read and retain with this manual all revision up-

dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have

access to accurate and up-to-date information re-

garding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle

Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be

found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website

at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

If you have ques-

tions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See

the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page

in this Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscription

after trial period and

are sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM

satellite service is

also available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-7

Warning and indicator lights ........................0-8

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules (P. 1-43)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

4. Front seat belt with pretensioner and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-43)

5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-6)

6. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)

7. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-22)

8. Seats (P. 1-2)

9. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) (P. 1-43)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2317

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-24)

2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-22)

3. Windshield (P. 8-19)

4. Power windows (if so equipped)

(P. 2-37)

5. Fuel-filler door, fuel-filler cap, recom-

mended fuel (P. 3-26, 9-2)

6. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key®

(if so equipped), keys (P. 3-5, 3-11,

3-2)

7. Mirrors, side camera (if so equipped)

(P. 3-30, 4-15)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

9. Flat tire (P. 6-3)

10. Tire chains (P. 8-31)

11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-25)

12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-25)

14. Front camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-15)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2071

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear wiper and washer switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-22)

2. Rear window washer nozzle

(if so equipped) (P. 2-22)

3. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-24)

4. Mirrors, outside mirror defroster

(if so equipped) (P. 3-30)

5. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

7. Rear hatch opener (P. 3-25)

8. Interior hatch release (P. 3-25)

9. Rear hatch opener switch

(if so equipped), rearview camera

(if so equipped) (P. 3-25, 4-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2296

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Cargo cover (if so equipped) (P. 2-31)

2. Rear seat (P. 1-2)

3. Interior lights (P. 2-40)

4. Front seat (P. 1-2)

5. Sun visors (P. 3-29)

6. Map lights (P. 2-40)

7. Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)

8. Glove box (P. 2-31)

9. Parking brake (P. 5-20)

10. Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2316

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-25)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-43, 2-28)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-22)

5. Vents (P. 4-24)

6. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch (P. 2-24)

7. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

9. Climate control (P. 4-25)

10. Audio system (P. 4-33)

11. Upper glove box (P. 2-31)

12. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

13. Vents (P. 4-24)

14. Lower glove box (P. 2-31)

15. Upper glove box release handle

(P. 2-31)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-32)

17. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

18. Ignition switch/Push-button ignition

switch (P. 5-8, 5-10)

19. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-21)

20. Tilt steering (P. 3-29)

21. Steering wheel audio control switches

(P. 4-74)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-26)

Hood release lever (P. 3-24)

23. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-30)

24. Outside mirror control switch (P. 3-31)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LIC3259

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

HR16DE engine

1. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)

3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

reservoir (P. 8-13)

5. Fusible link (P. 8-21)

6. Battery (P. 8-14)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI2377

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-13

Brake warning light 2-13

Charge warning light 2-14

Door open warning

light

2-14

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-14

High temperature

warning light (red)

2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Low fuel warning

light

2-14

Low tire pressure

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Low windshield-

washer fluid warning

light (if so equipped)

2-16

NISSAN Intelligent

Key® warning light

(if so equipped)

2-16

Power steering

warning light

2-16

P position selecting

warning lights (if so

equipped)

2-17

Warning

light

Name Page

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-17

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

Continuously Vari-

able Transmission

(CVT) position indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Cruise main switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Engine start opera-

tion indicator (if so

equipped)

2-18

Front fog light indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator

light

Name Page

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-18

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-18

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL)

2-18

Overdrive OFF indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-19

Security indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-19

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green) (if so

equipped)

2-19

Slip indicator light 2-19

Indicator

light

Name Page

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-20

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment . . ..................1-3

Folding rear seat ...............................1-4

Center armrest (if so equipped) ..................1-5

Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side only) ......1-5

Head restraints/headrests ..........................1-6

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ...................................1-7

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ...................................1-7

Remove .......................................1-7

Install .........................................1-8

Adjust.........................................1-8

Seat belts .......................................1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-10

Seat belt warning light .........................1-13

Pregnant women ..............................1-13

Injured persons................................1-13

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-13

Seat belt extenders ............................1-19

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-19

Child safety ......................................1-20

Infants........................................1-20

Small children.................................1-21

Larger children ................................1-21

Child restraints ...................................1-22

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ..............................1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-27

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-29

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-32

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ............................1-35

Booster seats .................................1-39

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-43

Precautions on SRS ...........................1-43

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-59

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-60

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you

slide the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the bar to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the

parking brake fully applied.

LRS2708 LRS2709

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust

the seat height until the desired position is

achieved.

FOLDING REAR SEAT

1. Ensure the rear outboard seat belt tongue is

properly stowed in the rear trim slot next to

the door 䊊

Abefore moving the rear seatback

䊊

Bin order to prevent the outboard seat belt

from getting caught behind the rear seat-

back.

2. Pull the knob 䊊

Cand fold 䊊

Dthe rear seat-

back down.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury or death in

an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2710 LRS2700 LRS2701

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

ARMREST (if so equipped for driver’s

side only)

To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting

position.

䊊

AStowed position

䊊

BResting position

LRS2733 LRS2454

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed. If

the head restraint/headrest was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to fol-

low these instructions can reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

●Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock

them in a desired adjustment position.

●The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

●Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

LRS2000

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

1must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

LRS2303 WRS0134

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-

tivated, they cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

See a NISSAN dealer.

●Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be

done by a NISSAN dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision by a

NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends

that all seat belt assemblies in use dur-

ing a collision be replaced unless the

collision was minor and the belts show

no damage and continue to operate

properly. Seat belt assemblies not in

use during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either dam-

age or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light

will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt cannot

be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS0786

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊

Auntil

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move, and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

C. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-

der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

LRS2708 LRS2674 LRS2675

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For additional

information, refer to “Supplemental air bag

warning light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the

buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Center of the rear bench seat

The center seat belt has a connector tongue 䊊

and a seat belt tongue 䊊

2. Both the connector

tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely

latched for proper seat belt operation.

WARNING

●Always fasten the connector tongue

and the seat belt in the order shown.

●Always make sure both the connector

tongue and the seat belt tongue are

secured when using the seat belt or

installing a child restraint. Do not use

the seat belt or child restraint with only

the seat belt tongue attached. This

could result in serious personal injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop.

Stowing the center seat belt

When folding down the rear seat, the rear center

seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position.

SSS0240 SSS0241

LRS8100

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Hold the connector tongue 䊊

1so that the

seat belt does not retract suddenly when the

tongue is released from the connector

buckle. Release the connector tongue by

inserting a suitable tool such as a key 䊊

2into

the connector buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt and store the seat belt

tongue on the stowed position 䊊

WARNING

Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt

connector except when folding down the

rear seat.

Attaching the center seat belt

Always be sure the center seat belt connector

tongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-

connect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull the seat belt tongue and connector

tongue from the stowed position 䊊

2. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector

buckle until it clicks 䊊

The center seat belt connector tongue can be

attached only into the rear center seat belt con-

nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, refer to “Fastening the

seat belts” in this section.

LRS8101

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

●When attaching the rear center seat belt

connector, be certain that the seat-

backs are completely secured in the

latched position and the rear center

seat belt connector is completely

secured.

●If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or sud-

den stop.

●Make sure to wear the rear center seat

belt with the seat belt passing through

the path 䊊

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the

adjustment button 䊊

1and move the shoulder belt

anchor to the desired position 䊊

2, so the belt

passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-

tion.

LRS8102 LRS0242

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an ex-

tender if an extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a collision

or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child can

be seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This can

occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-

buckle the seat belt to release the child. If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraints

●Forward-facing child restraints

●Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat

belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

CHILD SAFETY

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the height

or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-

facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child re-

straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. NISSAN

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can

pass the seat belt fit test below:

●Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

●Is the child able to sit without slouching?

●Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

●Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-

der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

●Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

●Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

If you answered no to any of these questions, the

child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before travel-

ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” in this

section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously

injure or kill a child. A rear-facing

child restraint must only be used in

the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only loads im-

posed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occupants

or damage the vehicle.

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use the LATCH anchors to install the

child restraint (not both at the same time).

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint.

●Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

LATCH system lower anchor locations

WRS0756

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-

tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-

straint in the center position using the LATCH

anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

If the cargo cover (if so equipped) contacts

the top tether strap when it is attached to

the top tether anchor, remove the cargo

cover from the vehicle or secure it on the

cargo floor below its attachment location.

If the cargo cover is not removed, it may

damage the top tether strap during a col-

lision. A child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraint top

tether strap is damaged.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the back of the rear

seats.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

LRS2245

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

●When installing a child restraint system

in the rear center position, both the

center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle tongue must be secured. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Attaching

the center seat belt” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do

not install child restraints that require the use

of a top tether strap in seating positions that

do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment information.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section for head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the back side of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the back side of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

Rear seats

LRS2452

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer

for details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

●When installing a child restraint system

in the rear center position, both the

center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle tongue must be secured. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Attaching

the center seat belt” in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs,

(29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-

fore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section. Do not install

child restraints that require the use of a top

tether strap in seating positions that do not

have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS2394

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, refer to ⬙Front pas-

senger air bag and status light⬙in this sec-

tion. Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section for head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the back side of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the back side of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer

for details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Rear seats

LRS2455

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than

the center of the child’s ears, a high back

booster seat should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor mode when using a booster

seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child re-

straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this

manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

LRS0464 WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional

information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side-impact colli-

sions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and is not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn

and the occupant seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers For additional information, in-

structions, precautions on seat belt usage, refer

to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always properly use the

seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to properly

wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints”

in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact supplemental air bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

SSS0188 WRS0032

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0159 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor — located in the front passenger seat

cushion frame)

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag

7. Rear side satellite sensor

8. Side satellite sensor

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

10. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items.

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

●Do not store luggage behind the seat

that can press into the seatback.

●Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

●If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating, please

take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer to

check the occupant classification

system.

●Until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in the

rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

LRS8106

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.

The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper front air bag system opera-

tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors

information from the crash zone sensor, the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors

and occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of

a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classification

sensors are also monitored. Based on informa-

tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned off under some

conditions, depending on the weight detected on

the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used.

If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passen-

ger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the

seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-

nated, but the air bag will be off). For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact NISSAN or a NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts should be

correctly worn and the driver and passenger

seated upright as far as practical away from the

steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force of the

front air bag inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,

the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which is

located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front passen-

ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a

crash.

●Front passenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as outlined in

this section: The light illuminates to

indicate that the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied front passenger seat and the pas-

senger meets the conditions as outlined in

this section: The light is OFF to indi-

cate that the front passenger air bag is op-

erational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle

is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

LRS0865

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations is

on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can

be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the front

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however if the occupant takes his/her weight off

the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by the regulations. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate

in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-

cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is posi-

tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re-

straint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the sys-

tem is OFF by using a special tool. However, until

you have confirmed with your dealer that your air

bag is working properly, reposition the occupant

or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the front passen-

ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who

is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the

vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light

will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and

then to OFF. This is normal system operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-

tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions

●Make sure that there are no objects weigh-

ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or

placed in the seatback pocket.

●Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of the

seatback.

●Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-

senger seat.

●Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an ob-

ject on the seat or floor behind it.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-

lowing the system to classify the front pas-

senger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system locks the classification during

driving so it is important that you confirm

that the front passenger is properly classi-

fied prior to driving. Also, the occupant

classification sensor system may recalcu-

late the weight of the occupant when the

vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop

sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated as

outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status light

is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and

no objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should

be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

●Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat

and the vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passen-

ger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sen-

sors:

●Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

●The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined in the “Child restraints”section of

this manual.

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should

not be modified or disconnected. Unau-

thorized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual must be followed. The side air bags

and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity impact. They

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-

tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag

and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other

injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

quickly in order to help protect the front and rear

outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of

the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air

bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag or damage to the

side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation

of electrical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-

ing harnesses* should not be modified

or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-

tivated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal pro-

cedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased with the seat

belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretension-

er(s) system. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental air bag warning light” in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located

on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WRS0897

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-

sioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these supplemental

air bag systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be

placed in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and preten-

sioner(s) should be replaced by a

NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and

pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

LRS0100

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to

the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems

or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

●If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your Occupant Classifica-

tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked

by a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still

functioning correctly. The OCS should

be checked even if no air bags deploy as

a result of the impact. Failure to verify

proper OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment resulting

in injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

MEMO

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-7

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-8

Fuel gauge ....................................2-9

Trip computer .................................2-10

Service interval reminder .......................2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders........................................2-12

Checking bulbs ...............................2-13

Warning lights ................................2-13

Indicator lights ................................2-18

Audible reminders .............................2-20

Security systems .................................2-21

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ...............................2-21

Wiper and washer switch .........................2-22

Switch operation ..............................2-22

Rear switch operation (if so equipped) ...........2-23

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-25

Headlight control switch........................2-25

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-26

Instrument brightness control ...................2-26

Turn signal switch .............................2-27

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-28

Horn ............................................2-28

Heated seats (if so equipped)......................2-29

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ...........2-30

Power outlet .....................................2-30

Storage .........................................2-31

Map pockets..................................2-31

Seatback pocket ..............................2-31

Storage trays .................................2-32

Cup holders ..................................2-32

Glove box ....................................2-34

Cargo cover (if so equipped)....................2-34

Divide-n-hide® adjustable floor

(if so equipped) ...............................2-35

Luggage hooks................................2-36

Windows ........................................2-37

Power windows (if so equipped) ................2-37

Manual windows (if so equipped)................2-39

Interior lights .....................................2-40

Map light .....................................2-40

Luggage compartment light. . ...................2-41

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-25)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-43, 2-28)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-22)

5. Vents (P. 4-24)

6. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch (P. 2-24)

7. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

9. Climate control (P. 4-25)

10. Audio system (P. 4-33)

11. Upper glove box (P. 2-31)

12. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

13. Vents (P. 4-24)

14. Lower glove box (P. 2-31)

15. Upper glove box release handle

(P. 2-31)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-32)

17. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

18. Ignition switch/Push-button ignition

switch (P. 5-8, 5-10)

19. Cruise control switches (if so

equipped) (P. 5-21)

20. Tilt steering (P. 3-29)

21. Steering wheel audio control switches

(P. 4-74)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-26)

Hood release lever (P. 3-24)

23. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-30)

24. Outside mirror control switch (P. 3-31)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LIC3259

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

1. Tachometer

2. Temperature gauge

3. Odometer/twin trip odometer/trip com-

puter

4. Fuel gauge

5. Speedometer

6. Trip odometer reset switch/trip com-

puter mode

7. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator (CVT models

only)

8. Instrument brightness control

CAUTION

●To clean the meter lens, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel with

a chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or cause discoloration to the

lens.

●Do not spray any liquid such as water on

the meter lens. Spraying liquid may

cause the system to malfunction.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2146

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Trip computer

4. Trip odometer reset switch/Instrument

brightness control

5. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator (CVT models

only)

6. Odometer/twin trip odometer/Outside

air temperature (if so equipped)

7. Outside Air Temperature (if so

equipped)

8. Fuel gauge

CAUTION

●To clean the meter lens, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel with

a chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or cause discoloration to the

lens.

●Do not spray any liquid such as water on

the meter lens. Spraying liquid may

cause the system to malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the

right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is

located within the trip computer.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3341

2-4 Instruments and controls

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

The odometer 䊊

1records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer 䊊

2records the distance

of individual trips.

Changing the display

Press the change button 䊊

3to change the dis-

play as follows:

Type A: Odometer (ODO) →Trip →

Trip →Instant fuel consumption →Aver-

age fuel consumption →DTE (cruising range) →

Outside Air Temperature (if so equipped) →

Odometer (ODO)

Type B: Trip →Trip →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Press the change/reset button 䊊

3for more than

1 second to reset the currently displayed trip

odometer to zero.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2139

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2758

Instruments and controls 2-5

Loose fuel cap warning message

Push the reset button 䊊

Afor more than 1 second

to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage after the fuel cap has been tightened. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section

of this manual.

Check tire pressure warning message

(if so equipped)

The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label.

Type A: The CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-

sage can be turned off using the reset button 䊊

on the meter, the low tire pressure warning light

will not be turned off.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2025

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2836

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2128

2-6 Instruments and controls

Type B: The check tire pressure warning mes-

sage is displayed when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected; the corresponding tire with low pres-

sure will appear blinking. Check and adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

TPMS Sensor ID Matching Process After

Tire Rotation (if so equipped)

Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification

code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or

replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, these

identification codes need to be matched to the

new tire/wheel position to make sure that the low

tire pressure display in the meter is correct. The

identification codes are matched to their posi-

tions using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See a

NISSAN dealer for service.

The low tire pressure warning light remains illu-

minated until the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure.

Type A Only: The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-

ing message is displayed each time the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position

as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in this section, “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in “Starting and driv-

ing” and “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2760

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2151

Instruments and controls 2-7

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ON position for the gauge to give a reading.

Type A: The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant temperature will

vary with the outside air temperature and driving

conditions.

Type B: Engine coolant temperature monitoring

is performed by the high temperature warning

light. For additional information, refer to “High

temperature warning light (red)” in this section.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

the temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2761

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2501

2-8 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The low fuel warning light will turn on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

check engine light may come on. Refuel

as soon as possible. After a few driving

trips, the light should turn off. If

the light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3257

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2762

Instruments and controls 2-9

TRIP COMPUTER

Type A: When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the trip computer change

button 䊊

Aon the instrument panel located near

the speedometer.

The following modes can be selected in the dis-

play 䊊

●Odometer

●Trip A

●Trip B

●Instant fuel consumption

●Average fuel consumption

●Distance to empty

●Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Type B: When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the menu button on

the steering wheel.

The following modes can be selected in the dis-

play 䊊

●Instant fuel consumption

●Average fuel consumption

●Distance to empty

●Average speed

●Travel time

●Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Instant fuel consumption

The instant fuel consumption mode shows the

instant fuel economy. The display updates in-

stantly when driving.

Average fuel consumption (mpg or l

(liter)/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the trip or change

button for more than approximately 1 second.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows (----).

Distance to empty

The distance to empty mode provides you with an

estimation of the distance that can be driven

before refueling. The range is constantly being

calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel

tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The distance to empty includes a low range

warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2138

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2764

2-10 Instruments and controls

distance to empty is automatically selected and

the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s atten-

tion. Press the trip computer change/reset button

if you wish to return to the mode that was se-

lected before the warning occurred.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dis-

tance to empty will display (----).

Average speed

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the menu button on the steering

wheel for longer than 1 second.

Travel time

The travel time mode (elapsed time) shows the

time since the last reset. The displayed time can

be reset by pushing the menu button on the

steering wheel for longer than 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Type A (if so equipped):Pushing the change

button for more than 3 seconds will reset all

modes except Trip A and distance to empty (dte).

Type B (if so equipped):Pushing the menu

button on the steering wheel for more than

3 seconds will reset average fuel economy, aver-

age speed and travel time.

SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, a wrench symbol and the distance to oil

change information will illuminate on the display

for approximately 5 seconds. The wrench symbol

and distance to oil change switch to oil display

status. Then the oil display status switches to

odometer and twin trip odometer/trip computer

information mode that was displayed before the

ignition switch was placed in the ACC, OFF or

LOCK position.

The oil level display status provides specific in-

formation regarding your approximate engine oil

level.

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

Oil change schedule set up

It is possible to adjust the interval distance to oil

change by pushing the trip computer change

button on the instrument panel located near the

speedometer for 3 seconds while the wrench

symbol and distance to oil change are displayed.

The symbol and distance display will start flash-

ing and the display shows the current interval.

Push the switch to increase the interval distance.

Each step increases the interval distance by 500

mi (1,000 km). The interval distance can be set

up to 18,000 mi (30,000 km) after which the

display returns to zero.

If no further action is made, the display returns to oil

display status indication and the new interval is set.

If the interval distance is set to 0, the display will

skip the distance to oil change information and

wrench symbol display mode. In order to return to

the distance to oil change information and wrench

symbol display mode, push the trip computer

change button on the instrument panel located

near the speedometer for approximately 3 seconds

after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON

position, and adjust the distance to oil change

schedule as previously described.

Refer to the Warranty Information & Maintenance

Booklet for the appropriate interval distance to oil

change.

CAUTION

●The oil level should be checked regu-

larly. Operating with insufficient

amount of oil level can damage the en-

gine and such damage is not covered by

the warranty.

●NISSAN recommends checking the oil

level every 3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Instruments and controls 2-11

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

(if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light

or Brake warning light Power steering warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Charge warning light P position selecting warning light

(if so equipped)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Door open warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped)

High temperature warning light (red) Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light (if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

(if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light Cruise main switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

or Low tire pressure warning light

(if so equipped)

Engine start operation indicator light

(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light

(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-12 Instruments and controls

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

or , , , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on briefly

and then go off:

or , (red), , ,

, , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates and

then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. For additional information, re-

fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort and pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nates, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

Instruments and controls 2-13

properly. Have the brake system checked and, if

necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer

promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt

braking. For additional information, refer to “Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this

section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the drive belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing,

or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer

immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the drive belt is

loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately, and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

High temperature warning light

(red)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the high temperature warning light illu-

minates and then turns off. This indicates that the

high temperature sensor in the engine coolant

system is operational.

When driving, the high temperature warning light

may turn off. This indicates that the engine cool-

ant temperature is within the normal range.

CAUTION

If the high temperature warning light illu-

minates while the engine is running, it

may indicate the engine temperature is

extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as

soon as possible. If the vehicle is over-

heated, continuing vehicle operation may

seriously damage the engine. For addi-

tional information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0

(Empty), showing no more fuel bars.

or Low tire pressure

warning light (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

2-14 Instruments and controls

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning is

also displayed in the odometer.

Type A: When the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates, you should stop and ad-

just the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening. The

low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pres-

sure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle

must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off

the low tire pressure warning light. Use a

tire pressure gauge to check the tire pres-

sure.

Type B: When the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates, you should stop and ad-

just the tire pressure of the corresponding

tire that is blinking in trip computer to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening. The

low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pres-

sure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle

must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off

the low tire pressure warning light. Use a

tire pressure gauge to check the tire pres-

sure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains illu-

minated until the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE

PRES warning message is displayed each time

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as

long as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to ⬙Check tire

pressure warning message⬙in this section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

WARNING

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Instruments and controls 2-15

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure show on

the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still comes on while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

as necessary. For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

warning light (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates green

when the ignition switch can be turned. The

Intelligent Key warning light illuminates red when

the ignition switch cannot be turned.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if the

Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle

while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position.

●If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,

make sure of the location of the Intelligent

Key as soon as possible. The Intelligent Key

should be carried by the driver while operat-

ing the vehicle.

●The Intelligent Key warning light turns off

about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is

brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks green

indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

2-16 Instruments and controls

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

ing warning light turns off. This indicates the

power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the power steering

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering, but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

P position selecting warning

light (if so equipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzer

sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shift

lever is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, place the ignition

switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position, then place the ignition

switch in the LOCK position.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-

sioner seat belt systems need servicing and your

vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioners may not function properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental re-

straint system (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-17

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag systems

and/or pretensioner systems will not op-

erate in an accident. To help avoid injury to

yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) position

indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the indicator light shows the shift lever

position. For additional information, efer to “Driv-

ing the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator

light (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

Engine start operation

indicator light (if so equipped)

For vehicles equipped with push button ignition

this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position with

the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the push-button ignition switch with the

brake pedal depressed.

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when

the front fog lights are ON. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The may also come on steady if the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs

out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap

is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle

has at least 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the

engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle

is not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Readiness for

2-18 Instruments and controls

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

●MIL on steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap. If the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message is displayed in the odom-

eter, and the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-

ing, tighten or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

●MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been

detected which may damage the emission

control system. To reduce or avoid emission

control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h);

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration;

– avoid steep uphill grades;

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light (if

so equipped)

The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates

when the overdrive off mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to “Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light (if so

equipped)

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light

blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks

when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that

the security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-

tems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlight position is

selected. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting

that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The

road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC off

switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the VDC

system is not operating.

Push the VDC off switch again or restart the

engine and the system will operate normally. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you place the

ignition switch in the ON position. The light will

turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while you are

driving, have the VDC system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

While the VDC system is operating, you might

feel slight vibration or hear the system working

when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this

is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove

the key and take it with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer

(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one

of the following improper operations is found.

●The ignition switch is not returned to the

LOCK position when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.

●The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-

hicle when operating the vehicle.

●Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional

information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the

vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking

brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to

zero.

2-20 Instruments and controls

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON

position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Security indicator light

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light

blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks

when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position with the key removed from the ignition

switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

LIC0474

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-21

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have when visiting

a NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted (if so equipped) by turning

the knob toward 䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2130

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3028

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-22 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir is empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

REAR SWITCH OPERATION (if so

equipped)

The rear window wiper and washer (if so

equipped) operate when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

䊊

2ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward 䊊

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

Type C (if so equipped)

LIC3239 LIC3101

Instruments and controls 2-23

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the window and ob-

scure your vision. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

LIC2116

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-24 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position, and

the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-

strument panel lights will come on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position, and

the headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, engage the

headlights, then push the lever forward. The

high beam lights come on and the

indicator light illuminates (blue). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Headlight control

switch” in this section.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2127

Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1509 LIC2128

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-25

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off, the head-

lights need not be on for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off after

a period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights oper-

ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position

or in the position. Turn the headlight switch

to the position for full illumination when

driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position or the headlight

switch is turned to the position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates when

the headlight control switch is in the

or position.

Type A

Press the control 䊊

Ato adjust the brightness of

instrument panel lights when driving at night.

Type B

Turn the knob 䊊

Aleft continuously for illumination

to decrease and turn the knob right continuously

for illumination to increase.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2137

2-26 Instruments and controls

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever

until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, and release the lever. The turn signal

will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2769 WIC1512

Instruments and controls 2-27

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon(s) on

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

WIC1513

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2419

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC1389

HORN

2-28 Instruments and controls

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

WIC1441

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-29

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-

tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

The power outlet is for powering electrical acces-

sories such as cellular telephones. The outlet is

rated at 12 volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. See a NISSAN dealer

for additional information.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 240 W (20A) power draw. Do

not use double adapters or more than

one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner (if so equipped), headlights

or rear window defroster (if so

equipped) is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC1548 LIC2754

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLET

2-30 Instruments and controls

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET

The seatback pocket is located on the back of the

front passenger seat. The pocket can be used to

store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items:

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest, or in the seatback

pocket.

LIC0799 LIC2782

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-31

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

LIC2112 LIC2113

Front

LIC2159

2-32 Instruments and controls

Lower the rear center armrest to access the cup

holders. CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

Rear – Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2162

Rear – Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2656

Bottle holder

LIC2158

Instruments and controls 2-33

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Never put anything on the cargo cover,

no matter how small. Any object on it

could cause an injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

●Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs

(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long peri-

ods of time.

●Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Your child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraint

top tether strap is damaged.

– If the cargo cover contacts the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor, remove the cargo

cover from the vehicle or secure it on

the cargo floor below its attachment

location. If the cargo cover is not re-

moved, it may damage the top tether

strap during a collision.

– Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure

the cargo so it does not contact the

top tether strap. Cargo that is not

properly secured or that contacts the

top tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision.

Upper glove box

LIC2532

Lower glove box

LIC2160

2-34 Instruments and controls

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment

contents hidden from the outside.

To remove the cargo cover:

●Remove the straps from the rear hatch.

●Remove the cargo cover holders䊊

1from the

rear pillar.

●Lower the cargo cover down against the

seatback, rotate and remove from the cargo

area.

DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE

FLOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not put objects heavier than 110 lbs

(50 kg) on the load floor.

To lower:

1. Lift and open the panel.

2. Move the load floor along the upper trim

panel channels toward the rear of vehicle

until it reaches the end of the slot.

LIC2125

LIC2527

Instruments and controls 2-35

3. Move the load floor along the lower trim

panel channels toward the front of the ve-

hicle until the latches lock it into place.

4. Lift and close the panel.

To raise:

1. Lift and open the panel

2. Move the load floor along the lower trim

panel channels toward the rear of the vehicle

until it reaches the end of the slot.

3. Move the load floor along the upper trim

panel channels toward the front of the ve-

hicle until the latches lock it into place.

4. Lift and close the panel.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

6.6 lbs (3 kg) to a single luggage hook.

LIC2528 LIC3185

2-36 Instruments and controls

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for a

period of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of time, the

power to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-37

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger’s side window switch

4. Right rear passenger’s window switch

5. Left rear passenger’s window switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it

down. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function

at any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

To close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

WIC0872 LIC0718

2-38 Instruments and controls

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, push the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held. To stop the

window, push the switch down while the window

is closing.

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed by

turning the hand crank on each door.

LIC0718 LIC0410 WIC0263

Instruments and controls 2-39

The interior light has a three-position switch and

operates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

1, the

interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-

tion. The lights will go off after a period of time

unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

2, the

interior lights will stay on for a period of time

when:

●The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed and the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activated

when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, a

key, or the power door lock switch.

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

3, the

interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door

position.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHT

The map light has a three-position switch and

operates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

3, the

map light illuminates, regardless of door position.

The light will go off after a period of time unless

the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position.

SIC2063A LIC2126

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-40 Instruments and controls

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

2, the

map light will stay on for a period of time when:

●The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if so

equipped), a key or the power door lock

switch while all doors are closed and the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the timer is activated

when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the key fob (if

so equipped), a key, or the power door lock

switch.

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

1, the

map light does not illuminate, regardless of door

position.

The light will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

will turn off.

The light also illuminates with other interior lights

when the interior light switch is in the DOOR

position. For additional information, refer to “Inte-

rior light” in this section.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period

of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-41

MEMO

2-42 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .........3-3

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

(if so equipped) ................................3-4

Doors ............................................3-5

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch

(if so equipped) ................................3-6

Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . ..........3-7

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

Remote keyless entry system (models without

NISSAN Intelligent Key®) (if so equipped) ...........3-7

How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...........3-11

Operating range...............................3-13

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation ..............3-14

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-18

Warning lights and audible reminders ............3-21

Warning signals ...............................3-22

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-23

Hood ...........................................3-24

Rear hatch.......................................3-25

Opening the rear hatch.........................3-25

Rear hatch release.............................3-26

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-26

Opener operation..............................3-26

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-27

Steering wheel ...................................3-29

Tilt operation..................................3-29

Sun visors .......................................3-29

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-30

Mirrors ..........................................3-30

Rearview mirror ...............................3-30

Outside mirrors ...............................3-31

1. Master key

2. Transponder chip (if so equipped)

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

key numbers so it is very important to keep track

of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to make a

duplicate. If you still have a key, a NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it.

1. Integrated door lock key fob

2. Key number plate

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2130

Type B—Remote keyless entry key fob

(if so equipped)

LPD2045

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

key numbers so it is very important to keep track

of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, a NISSAN dealer can

duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)

3. Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys

must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to

use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since

the registration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key components when

registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent

Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

LPD0350

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,

which can be used in case of a discharged bat-

tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in

the same way as an ordinary key.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this

section and “Storage” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

These keys have a transponder chip in the key

head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN dealer can

duplicate your existing key. As many as four

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be

used with one vehicle. You should bring all

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that

you have to a NISSAN dealer for registration. This

is because the registration process will erase the

memory of all key codes previously registered

SPA1951

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these components

will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time

of registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the

vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear

of the vehicle 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2160

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks

all doors 䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

LPD2161

Inside lock

SPA2760 WPD0381

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to the

lock position and any door is open, all doors will

lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent

Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors

will unlock automatically and a chime will sound

after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so

equipped)

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

2, the

door can be opened from the outside or the

inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the out-

side.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The remote keyless entry key fob trans-

mits radio waves when the buttons are

pressed. The FAA advises radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

remote keyless entry key fob while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the

interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by

using the key fob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective

distance depends on the conditions around the

vehicle.

LPD2166

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(models without NISSAN Intelligent

Key®) (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

As many as five key fobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional key fobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged

●the distance between the vehicle and the

key fob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

●Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

●Do not drop the key fob.

●Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the key fob.

●Wetting may damage the key fob. If the

key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

●Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and per-

sonal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key

fob. This will prevent the key fob from

unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, please contact a NISSAN

dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors and the rear hatch.

4. Press the button on the key fob. All

the doors lock. The hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once to

indicate all doors are locked.

LPD2039

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●When the button is pressed with

all doors locked, the hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once as a

reminder that the doors are already

locked.

●If a door is open and you press

the button, the doors will lock

but the horn will not beep and the hazard

lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For additional

information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep

feature” in this section.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the key fob once.

●Only the driver’s door unlocks.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed with the ignition

switch in any position except the ON posi-

tion.

●The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for a period of time when the inte-

rior light switch is in the DOOR position with

the ignition switch in any position except the

ON position.

Press the button on the key fob again

within 5 seconds.

●All doors and the rear hatch unlock.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-

ing by inserting the key into the ignition switch

and placing the ignition switch in the ON or

START position, locking the doors with the key

fob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF

position.

Auto relock

When the button on the key fob is

pressed, all doors will lock automatically within

1 minute unless one of the following operations is

performed:

●Any door is opened.

●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and

the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD2040

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for a period of time, or

●any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior light

Press the button on the key fob once to

turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

LPD2041 LPD2044

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks

using the remote control function or pushing the

request switch on the vehicle without taking the

key out from a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may affect the

Intelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-

mental conditions may interfere with the opera-

tion of the Intelligent Key under the following

operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a

CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately two years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink

green for about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

When the battery is discharged, firmly apply the

foot brake and touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key. Then push the ignition switch

while depressing the brake pedal within 10 sec-

onds after the chime sound. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Push-button ignition switch” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●If the outside temperature is below 14°F

(-10°C) the battery of the Intelligent Key

may not function properly.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

LPD2162 WPD0375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch or rear hatch request

switch within the range of operation.

LPD2163 LPD2164

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors and the rear hatch.

3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊

1or

the rear hatch request switch 䊊

2while car-

rying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear hatch will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds once.

NOTE:

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch or rear hatch request

switch while the ignition switch is

pushed in.

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch or the rear hatch request

switch while the ignition switch is not

in the LOCK position.

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch or the rear hatch request

switch while the ignition switch is not

in the LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch or the rear hatch re-

quest switch with the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the rear hatch

opener switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked inside the vehicle, lockout protec-

tion is equipped with the Intelligent Key.

LPD2165 LPD2167

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the rear parcel shelf.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

the cargo cover.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on or

under the spare tire area.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

1or

the rear hatch request switch 䊊

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the

outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

again within 1 minute to unlock all doors and

the rear hatch.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors and the rear hatch will be locked auto-

matically unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing the re-

quest switch.

●Opening any doors or the rear hatch.

●Engaging the ignition switch from the locked

position.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following operations.

LPD2164 LPD2165 LPD2167

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

●Placing the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the rear hatch are open

or not closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors and the rear hatch.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once.

5. All doors and the rear hatch will be locked.

WPD0359

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 1 min-

ute to unlock all doors and the rear hatch.

All doors and the rear hatch will be locked auto-

matically unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pressing

the button.

●Opening any doors or the rear hatch.

●Engaging the ignition switch from the lock

position.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by

performing one of the following operations.

●Placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch in the OFF

position.

WPD0360

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for a period of time, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●The request switch on the driver or passen-

ger door or rear hatch has been pushed and

the Intelligent Key is in range of the door

handle.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

WPD0374 WPD0362

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

䊊

1P (Park) position selecting warning

light (if so equipped)

䊊

2NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS

The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function

that is designed to minimize improper operations

and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.

The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light

illuminates when improper operations are de-

tected.

䊊

1P (Park) position selecting warning

light (if so equipped)

䊊

2NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warning

light illuminates, be sure to check both the

vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2094

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2219

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the “Trouble-

shooting guide” that follows and

“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Audible reminder and warning when

locking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside

and outside the vehicle, check for the following:

●The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position.

●The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-

hicle.

●The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Audible reminder and warning when

the engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light

() in the instrument panel illuminates red:

●Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

●Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-

er’s door is opened, check the following:

●The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)

position and the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK position.

●The warning chime may stop when one of

the following is performed:

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

– Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the engine

starts

When the Intelligent Key system warning light

() blinks red and the outside buzzer

sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Warning for low battery power

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink

green for about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. This warning

is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent

Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a

NISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key from

being left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door lock

switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of

the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will

warn you when the door is closed.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stop

the engine

The P (Park) warning light in the instrument

panel illuminates and the inside chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Make sure that the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” position. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF”

position.

When pushing the door handle request

switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When closing the doors

The key warning light in the instrument

panel blinks, the outside chime sounds 3

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

Place the ignition switch in the “OFF”

position.

The P (Park) warning light in the instrument

panel illuminates and the outside chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “OFF”

position and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Make sure that the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position and place the ignition switch

in the “OFF” position.

The outside chime sounds for approximately

3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When stopping the engine The P (Park) position warning light in the

instrument panel blinks in red.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Make sure that the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position and place the ignition switch

in the LOCK position.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument

panel blinks in green.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. For

additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

When pushing the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few sec-

onds and all the doors unlock.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

1located

below the instrument panel until the hood

springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the hood and

grille and push the lever sideways with your

fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod 䊊

4and insert it into

the slot 䊊

Hold the coated parts 䊊

Awhen removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-

tact with the metal parts, as they may be

hot immediately after the engine has been

stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support rod to

its original position, lower the hood to approxi-

mately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release

it. This allows proper engagement of the hood

latch.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

LPD2370

HOOD

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

The rear hatch must be closed securely

before driving. An open rear hatch could

allow dangerous exhaust gases to be

drawn inside the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

OPENING THE REAR HATCH

To open the rear hatch, unlock it with one of the

following operations, then pull the handle.

●Push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

●Unlock all doors using the key.

●Press the button on the key fob (if

equipped) twice. For additional information,

refer to “Remote keyless entry system”in this

section.

●Push the rear hatch request switch or door

handle request switch (if equipped) twice.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in this section.

●Press the button on the Intelligent Key

(if equipped) twice. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

this section.

LPD2170

REAR HATCH

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

REAR HATCH RELEASE

The rear hatch release mechanism allows the rear

hatch to be opened in the event of a discharged

battery.

To release the rear hatch from the inside of the

vehicle, perform the following operations:

1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional

information, refer to “Folding rear seat” in the

“Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

2. Insert a suitable tool in the access opening.

Move the release lever to the left (passenger

side). The rear hatch will be unlatched.

3. Use the exterior rear hatch handle to open.

NOTE:

If you had to open the rear hatch using this

lever, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below the

instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull

the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door

securely.

LPD2366 LPD2371

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to the “Recommended fuel” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage will be displayed if the fuel-filler

cap is not properly tightened. It may

take a few driving trips for the message

to be displayed. Failure to tighten the

fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning message is dis-

played may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and continue

to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected by a NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, refer to the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

NOTE:

Changing ignition switch status during the

refueling process may cause a delay in fuel

gauge response.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message dis-

plays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been

refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the

message to be displayed. To turn off the warning

message, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-

viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

LPD2172

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2025

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-

ton 䊊

Ain the meter for about 1 second to

turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever 䊊

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down 䊊

2to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

䊊

1To block glare from the front, swing down the

sun visor.

䊊

2To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing the

visor to the side.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2767 LPD0355

WPD0435

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

䊊

3Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

ibly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and slide the mirror cover open. Some

vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when

the mirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRROR

The night position 䊊

1reduces glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

LPD0481 WPD0126

MIRRORS

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror remote control only operates

when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch 䊊

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

LPD0237 LPD0259

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

MEMO

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-4

How to use the touch-screen . . ..................4-5

How to use the BACK button ....................4-7

How to use the APPS button ....................4-7

Clock Set......................................4-9

button...................................4-9

How to use the ON•OFF button/VOL

(volume) control knob ...........................4-9

How to use the CAMERA button .................4-9

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-10

How to read the displayed lines .................4-11

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-11

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-13

Operating tips.................................4-14

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-15

Available views ................................4-16

Difference between predictive and actual

distances .....................................4-19

How to switch the display ......................4-22

How to adjust the screen view ..................4-22

View malfunction ..............................4-23

Operating tips.................................4-23

Vents ...........................................4-24

Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) ................4-25

Controls......................................4-26

Heater operation ..............................4-27

Air conditioner operation .......................4-28

Air flow charts.................................4-29

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-33

Audio system ....................................4-33

Radio ........................................4-33

FM radio reception ............................4-33

AM radio reception ............................4-34

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-34

Audio operation precautions ....................4-34

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(Type A) (if so equipped) .......................4-42

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(Type B) (if so equipped) .......................4-46

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-51

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-56

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models without Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-62

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ...............................4-64

iPod®* player operation without Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-66

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-68

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System Type A (if so equipped) .......4-71

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped)......4-72

Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation

System (if so equipped) ........................4-72

CD care and cleaning ..........................4-74

Steering Wheel Switch for Audio Control ........4-74

Antenna ......................................4-76

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps (if so equipped) .....4-76

Registering with NissanConnect

Mobile

Apps.........................................4-76

Connect Phone ...............................4-77

Application Download..........................4-77

Car phone or CB radio ............................4-77

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped).........4-78

Regulatory Information .........................4-80

Using the system ..............................4-80

Control buttons ...............................4-83

Getting started ................................4-83

List of voice commands ........................4-85

Voice Adaptation (VA) mode ....................4-89

Manual control . . ..............................4-91

Troubleshooting guide .........................4-92

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped).........4-93

Regulatory Information .........................4-94

Using the system ..............................4-95

Control buttons ...............................4-96

Connecting procedure .........................4-97

Voice commands ..............................4-98

Making a call. .................................4-99

Receiving a call ..............................4-100

During a call .................................4-100

Ending a call .................................4-100

Text messaging. . .............................4-101

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-102

Manual control ...............................4-103

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-104

Regulatory Information ........................4-106

Voice commands .............................4-106

Connecting Procedure ........................4-106

Vehicle phonebook ...........................4-107

Making a call.................................4-107

Receiving a call ..............................4-107

During a call .................................4-107

Ending a call .................................4-107

Text messaging...............................4-108

Bluetooth® settings ..........................4-110

Phone settings ...............................4-111

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) .................................4-112

Using the system .............................4-112

System features ..............................4-113

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands .............................4-114

Navigation System voice commands ............4-114

Audio system voice commands.................4-115

Information voice commands...................4-115

My Apps Voice Commands ....................4-115

Help voice commands ........................4-115

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-116

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately and

contact a NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such

conditions may lead to accidents, fire or

electrical shock.

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button**

4. button

5. (brightness control) button

6. BACK button

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. ON•OFF button / VOL (volume) control

knob

LHA3621

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

*For additional information regarding the Naviga-

tion system control buttons, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

**For additional information regarding the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control

button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System with Navigation System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can be

selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass display screen may break if it

is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key to return to the

previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time.

Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA2916

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the previous

screen.

HOW TO USE THE APPS BUTTON

For additional information about the “SiriusXM

Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For additional information, refer to “Nissan-

Connect

Mobile Apps” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section.

To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-

tures and modes that are available for your ve-

hicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA2773 LHA2916

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respec-

tive times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock

using the “Set Clock Manually” key.

Set Clock

Manually

Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must

be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Sav-

ings Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.

Color Adjust touch-screen color.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the

screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/

Clear Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

CLOCK SET

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “System” key

4. Touch the “Clock” key.

5. Touch “Clock Mode” to select “Manual” to

adjust time manually.

6. Touch “Set Clock Manually”.

7. Touch “+” and “-” keys to adjust hour, min-

ute, day, month and year.

8. Press the BACK button to finish.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again will

change the display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the button for more than

2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button

again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON•OFF

BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL

KNOB

Press the ON•OFF button to turn audio function

on and off. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to

adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA

BUTTON

For additional information, refer to “Rearview

Monitor” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Re-

verse) position or the CAMERA button is

pressed, the monitor display shows the view to

the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RearView

Monitor could result in serious injury or

death.

●The RearView Monitor is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper back-

ing. Always turn and look out the win-

dows, and check mirrors to be sure that

it is safe to move before operating the

vehicle. Always back up slowly.

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to help

avoid damaging the vehicle.

●The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show ev-

ery object.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation. The system

will not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Objects in a RearView Monitor will ap-

pear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rear view and out-

side mirrors.

●Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.

Do not scratch the cover when cleaning

dirt or snow from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

LHA0437

LHA3624

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3625

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The procedure for adjusting the quality of the

screen differs depending on the type of screen

present on the vehicle.

For vehicles without Navigation System:

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift

lever in R (reverse)

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. The Settings screen will show brightness.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

LHA3626

Without Navigation System

LHA3639

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again, to

display contrast.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

setting up or down.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to com-

plete the adjustment.

●Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

For vehicles with Navigation System:

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift

lever in R (reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up

or down.

5. Press the button again to access the

Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up

or down.

●Do not adjust the display of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration. To clean the camera,

wipe with a cloth dampened with a di-

luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

●When the shift lever is shifted to R (Re-

verse), the monitor screen automatically

changes to the RearView Monitor mode.

However, the radio can be heard.

●It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has

been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be

distorted momentarily until the RearView

Monitor screen is displayed completely.

When the shift lever is returned to a position

other than R (Reverse), it may take some

time until the screen changes. Objects on

the screen may be distorted until they are

completely displayed.

With Navigation System

LHA3679

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from those of the

actual object.

●When the contrast of objects is low at night,

pressing the ENTER/SETTING button may

not change the brightness.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night.

●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects. Clean the camera.

●Do not use body wax on the camera window.

If body wax does get on the camera window,

wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-

ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor. The monitor displays various

views of the position of the vehicle.

Available views:

●Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding view of the vehicle from

above.

●Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

●Front View

An approximately 150-degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Rear View

An approximately 150-degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed 䊊

1. When in the

LHA3086

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊

3of

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor 䊊

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the Around View ®

Monitor could result in serious injury or

death.

●The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature. It is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation because it has

areas where objects cannot be viewed.

Always look out the windows and check

to be sure that it is safe to move.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

●Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirror in the stored

position, and make sure that the hatch

is securely closed when operating the

vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

●The distance between objects viewed

on the Around View® Monitor differs

from the actual distance.

●The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the cameras.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

AVAILABLE VIEWS

WARNING

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a paved,

level surface. The distance viewed on

the monitor may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle and

displayed objects.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

●Objects in the monitor will appear visu-

ally opposite than when viewed in the

rearview and outside mirrors.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predictive course lines and the actual

course line.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●The vehicle width and predictive course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

●The displayed lines on the rearview will

appear slightly off to the right, because

the rearview camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width

and distance to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

A, are displayed on the moni-

tor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predictive course lines 䊊

Indicate the predictive course when operating

the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the steering

wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will

move depending on how much the steering

wheel is turned and will not be displayed while

the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead posi-

tion.

Front view

SAA1840

Rear view

SAA1896

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the straight-ahead posi-

tion, both the right and left predictive

course lines 䊊

6are displayed. When the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the oppo-

site side of the turn.

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-

sition and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the distance between objects

viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the

actual distance.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

2are

indicated in black.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted

in yellow for three seconds after the bird’s-eye

view is displayed. In addition, the non-viewable

corners 䊊

3are displayed in red and blink for the

first three seconds to remind the driver to be

cautious.

WARNING

●

Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear

further than the actual distance because

the bird’s-eye view is a pseudo view that

is processed by combining the views

from the cameras on the outside mirrors,

the front and the rear of the vehicle.

●Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

●Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

●The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

●A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment

will increase as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

●Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

LHA2547

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front-side view

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front

end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the vehicle

width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and side

䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted line.

CAUTION

●The turn signal light may look like the

side-of-vehicle line. This is not a

malfunction.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft ( 1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

LHA2652

LHA3624

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the

place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that any object on

the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3625

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

There may be a small distance visible between

the vehicle and the object in the bird’s-eye view

on the display 䊊

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

LHA1201 LHA2548 LHA3626

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different

split screen views depending on the position of

the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to

switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

●Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

●Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the

only available view is front view/front-side view

split screen.

When the shift lever is not in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the screen

changes from the Around View® Monitor screen

to the previous screen.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

VIEW

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift

lever in R (reverse).

2. Press the button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up

or down.

5. Press the button again to access the

Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up

or down.

LHA3679

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Do not adjust the display of the RearView Monitor

while the vehicle is moving.

VIEW MALFUNCTION

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, the

Around View® Monitor may not be calibrated

correctly. This will not hinder normal driving func-

tion but the system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration. To clean the camera,

wipe with a cloth dampened with a di-

luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

●The screen displayed on the Around View®

Monitor will automatically return to the pre-

vious screen three minutes after the CAM-

ERA button has been pressed with the shift

lever in a position other than the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the view is switched, the display im-

ages on the screen may be displayed in

some delay.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly. This is not a malfunction.

LHA2550

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

●The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects. This is not a malfunction.

●Objects on the Around View® Monitor may

not be clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment. This is not a

malfunction.

●There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-

era, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a mild detergent diluted with

water.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by open-

ing, closing or rotating.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-

ing the slide as indicated 䊊

Side vents

SAA3126

Center vents

LHA2085

VENTS

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

1. Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

2. Fan control dial

3. Air conditioner button

4. Temperature control dial

5. Air intake lever (Air recirculation and

Fresh air)

6. Air flow control dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off,

and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select the

air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side vents.

— Air flows from center and side vents

and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets and

foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Fresh air

Move the air intake lever to the position.

The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.

Air recirculation

Move the air intake lever to the position to

recirculate air inside the vehicle.

Use the selection:

●when driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired position and press the button to

LHA3655

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light

comes on when the air conditioner is operating.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion for normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center vents.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

5. Align left and right vents to direct air flow

towards the front side windows.

NOTE:

Side vents should direct air flow towards

the front side windows to improve defog-

ging performance.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to the maxi-

mum position and the temperature control

dial to the full hot position.

●When or are selected, the air

conditioner turns on (the indicator light may

not illuminate). This will dehumidify the air

and help defog the windows.

●To turn off the air conditioner after

or ; or or should

be selected and the A/C button should be

pressed two times.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side and

center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.

When the temperature control dial is moved to

the full hot or full cool position, the air between

the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-

perature.

1. Move the air intake lever to position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

5. Align left and right vents to direct air flow

towards the front side windows.

NOTE:

Side vents should direct air flow towards

the front side windows to improve defog-

ging performance.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to the maxi-

mum position and the temperature control

dial to the full hot position.

●When or are selected, the air

conditioner turns on (the indicator light may

not illuminate). This will dehumidify the air

and help defog the windows.

●To turn off the air conditioner after

or ; or or should

be selected and the A/C button should be

pressed two times.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position, and press the button

to activate the air conditioner. When the air con-

ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-

tions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Press the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, move the air intake lever to

the position. Be sure to return to

the position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired

position.

4. Press the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

5. Align left and right vents to direct air flow

towards the front side windows.

NOTE:

Side vents should direct air flow towards

the front side windows to improve defog-

ging performance.

●When or are selected, the air

conditioner turns on (the indicator light may

not illuminate). This will dehumidify the air

and help defog the windows.

●To turn off the air conditioner after

or ; or or should

be selected and the A/C button should be

pressed two times.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-

utes with the windows open to vent hot air

from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. The air intake lever

should always be in the position for

heating and defrosting.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

LHA3656 LHA3657

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3658 LHA3659

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

LHA3660

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. For additional information, refer to “Air

conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-

dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-

mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, press the (power) or ON•OFF button

to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with

the engine not running, the ignition should be

placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is

selected unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

LHA0099

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the

file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant and

irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the

human ear doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, encoding bit

rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-

mation is displayed on the Artist/song title

line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Micro-

soft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA

files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for

folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there

will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB de-

vices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for regu-

latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB connection

memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod®

players. Some USB devices may not be sup-

ported by this system.

●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB (if so equipped) use:

●Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and

care of the device.

Notes for iPod® (if so equipped) use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPod®.

●An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

●Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-

mentarily black out, but will soon recover.

●If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

iPod®* player (if so equipped)

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen. We

recommend using English or Spanish lan-

guage characters with an iPod®.

●Large video podcast files cause slow re-

sponses in the iPod®. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

●If the iPod® automatically selects large

video podcast files while in the shuffle mode,

the vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on the iPod®.

●The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod®.

●If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very long

names for the song title, album name or artist

name to prevent the iPod® from resetting

itself.

●Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of func-

tion may occur:

●Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in

(40 mm) radius maximum).

●Twist the cable excessively (more than

180 degrees).

●Pull or drop the cable.

●Do not force the iPod® cable connector

into the device port.

●Close the center console lid on the cable

or connectors.

●Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

●Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.

●Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the

cable and/or connectors are wet. It may

damage the iPod®.

●If the cable and connectors are exposed to

water, allow the cable and/or connectors to

dry completely before connecting the cable

to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).

●If the connector is exposed to fluids other

than water, evaporative residue may cause a

short between the connector pins. In this

case, replace the cable, otherwise damage

to the iPod® and a loss of function may

occur.

●If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-

nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-

uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do

not use the cable and contact a NISSAN

dealer to replace the cable with a new one.

●When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature and with-

out direct sun exposure.

●Do not use the cable for any other purposes

other than its intended use in the vehicle.

*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so

equipped)

●Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module before using the Bluetooth® audio.

●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-

dio will vary depending on the devices. Make

sure how to operate your audio device be-

fore using it with this system.

●The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-

der the following conditions:

●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

●Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

●Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away from

the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent

tone quality degradation and wireless con-

nection disruption.

●While an audio device is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

●This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon and Bosch.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. CD insert slot

3. SCAN button

4. DISP (display) button

5. RPT (repeat )/ RDM (random) button

6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button

7. AUX IN jack

8. AUX button

9. CD button

10. AM button

11. FM button

12. VOL (volume) control knob / (power)

button

13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

14. TRACK button

15. SEEK button

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) control knob/

(power) button

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, then press the (power) button. If

you listen to the radio with the engine not running,

place the ignition in the ACC position. The mode

(radio or CD) that was playing immediately before

the system was turned off resumes playing.

LHA8804

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the (power) button again turns

the system off.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the right to

increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.

MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,

Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and Clock)

Press the MENU button to change the mode as

follows:

Bass →Treble →Balance →Fade →Spd. Sen.

Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) →AUX IN Volume

→Clock →Clock Adjust

To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance,

press the MENU button until the desired mode

appears in the display. Press the SEEK or

TRACK button to adjust the setting to the

desired level (-5 to +5). Balance adjusts the

sound between the right and left speakers. Fade

adjusts the sound between the front and rear

speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the vol-

ume of the audio system as the vehicle’s driving

speed changes. It can be set as follows:

OFF →LOW →MID →HIGH

DISP (display) button

Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is

playing to change the text shown in the audio

display as follows:

For CDs:

Running Time →Album Title: →Artist Name: →

Song Title

For MP3 CDs:

Running Time →Folder Title: →Album Title: →

Artist Name: →Song Title:

If the text information is too long to fully be dis-

played on the screen; press and hold the DISP

button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll

through the rest of the text.

Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is

playing to toggle the audio display between sta-

tion number and RDS.

Clock operation

To turn the clock display on or off, press the

MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears

on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

toggle the setting (ON or OFF).

Clock set

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until

“Adjust Clock: NO” appears on the display.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to change to

“Adjust Clock: YES”.

3. Press the MENU button.

4. When “Change Hour” appears, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the hours.

5. Press MENU button.

6. When “Change Minute” appears, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust minutes.

7. Press MENU button to finish.

The display will return to the regular clock display

after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is per-

formed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

FM/AM radio operation

AM and FM buttons

Press the AM button to change the band to AM.

If another audio source is playing when the AM

button is pressed, the audio source playing will

automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will begin playing.

Press the FM button to change the band as

follows:

FM1 →FM2 →FM1

If another audio source is playing when the FM

button is pressed, the audio source playing will

automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio automatically changes

from stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK and TRACK (tuning)

buttons

Press the SEEK button to tune from low to

high frequencies and stop at the next broadcast-

ing station.

Press the TRACK button to tune from high

to low frequencies and stop at the next broad-

casting station.

Press and hold either button to seek at a faster

speed.

SCAN (tuning) button

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the

display window. Scan tuning begins from low to

high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-

onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-

cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN

blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button

again during this 5 second period stops scan

tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM or FM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and carefully insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side up. The compact

disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts

to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns

off and the last used compact disc starts to play.

SEEK and TRACK (Fast

Forward, Rewind) buttons

When the SEEK button or TRACK

button is pressed while the compact disc is play-

ing, the compact disc plays at an increased

speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When

the button is released, the compact disc returns

to normal play speed.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK and TRACK buttons

When the SEEK button is pressed while

the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-

ing the present one starts to play from the begin-

ning. Press the SEEK button several times

to skip several tracks. Each time the button is

pressed, the CD advances one additional track.

The track number appears in the display window.

(When the last track on the compact disc is

skipped, the first track is played.)

When the TRACK button is pressed, the

track being played returns to the beginning.

Press the TRACK button several times to

skip back several tracks. Each time the button is

pressed the CD moves back one track.

RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button

Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc

is playing to change the play pattern as follows:

CD:

TRACK REPEAT →DISC RANDOM →DISC

REPEAT

MP3/WMA CD:

FOLDER REPEAT →TRACK REPEAT →DISC

RANDOM →FOLDER RANDOM →DISC RE-

PEAT

TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently play-

ing will be repeated.

DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the

disc will be mixed during play.

DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be

repeated.

FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current

folder will be repeated.

FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in

the folder will be mixed during play.

SCAN (CDs) button

Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds

to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 sec-

onds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during

scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans through

all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is

pressed during scan mode.

CD EJECT

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When the button is pressed while the

compact disc is playing, the compact disc will

eject and the system will turn off.

AUX (Auxiliary) button

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The

AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard

analog audio input such as from a portable cas-

sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-

puters.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device

when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN

Volume” appears on the screen to control the

incoming volume level of the auxiliary input de-

vice. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the

level between 0 and +3.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System” in

this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to ⬙Audio opera-

tion precautions⬙in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. RPT button

3. RDM button

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. USB button

7. AUX button

8. A-Z button

9. ENTER button and TUNE/MENU control

knob

10. (back) button

11. SETUP button

12. DISP button

13. Station select (1–6) buttons

14. Forward and Backward

SEEK/TRACK buttons

15. VOL (volume control knob)/ (power)

button

16. CD button

17. FM•AM button

LHA3016

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) control knob /

(power) button

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, then press the VOL (volume) control

knob / (power) button. If you listen to the

radio with the engine not running, place the igni-

tion in the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD)

that was playing immediately before the system

was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the VOL (volume) control knob /

(power) button again turns the system off.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob /

(power) button to the right to increase volume or

to the left to decrease volume.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-

patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.

Pressing the AUX button repeatedly will cycle

through available input sources:

AUX line in →USB (if so equipped) →AUX line in

NOTE:

Sources only shown in menu if they are

connected and/or detected.

DISP (display) button

Pressing the DISP button displays song informa-

tion, if available, such as artist, album, track name,

folder name, and source.

NOTE:

The DISP button only provides this infor-

mation in non-radio modes.

How to use the SETUP button

To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-

tures and modes that are available for your ve-

hicle:

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU control knob until the

desired item is selected on the menu list and

then press the ENTER button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Menu item Result

Audio Selecting this item allows user to adjust various audio settings.

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

AUX Vol. Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected tot the system. Available options are LOW, MID,

and HIGH.

Clock Selecting this item allows user to adjust various clock settings.

Set Time Allows user to set time manually.

ON/OFF Switches clock display on or off.

Format 12h:24h Allows user to change time format between 12 hour and 24 hour.

Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type A)” in this section.

Language Allows user to change system language.

List of Languages Available language are Spanish, Portuguese, English, and French.

Scroll Direction Allows user to change the scrolling direction used by the TUNE/MENU control knob.

Clockwise Select up or down and press ENTER button.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select

CLOCK.

3. Press the ENTER button.

4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select “set

time”.

5. Press the ENTER button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust

hours.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust min-

utes.

9. Press the ENTER button to finish.

The display will return to the regular clock display

after 10 seconds.

TUNE/MENU control knob/Enter button:

Turn the TUNE/MENU control knob to the left or

right to scroll and then press ENTER to select

desired item.

A–Z button

When listening to music via USB or iPod®,

pressing the A-Z button will launch a quick

search function in music browser that will allow

user to search for music alphabetically using the

TUNE/MENU control knob.

RDM and RPT button:

When listening to music via USB or iPod®,

pressing the RDM button will shuffle the songs

being played. Pressing the RPT button will repeat

the song being played.

(back) button

Pressing the (back) button will return the

user to the previous menu.

FM/AM radio operation

FM-AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

If the FM-AM button is pressed for more than

1.5 seconds, the AUTOSTORE function will be

initiated. The “AST” icon will appear and “AU-

TOSTORE” may appear on the display screen, a

beep is heard and the radio mutes. The system

will then automatically detect the 6 stations with

the strongest frequency and save them as pre-

sets. Once AUTOSTORE is complete, the “AST”

icon will disappear and “AUTOSTORE COM-

PLETE” may appear on the display screen.

TUNE/MENU control knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/MENU control knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or

to tune from low to high or high to low frequen-

cies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

Hold either button to tune continuously. Then

release button once desired frequency is

reached.

Station select (1 to 6) memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for

FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM or FM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the

desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until

a beep sound is heard.

3. The station memory position (P1–P6) will

now be displayed next to the band. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

DISP button:

When the DISP button is pressed while a CD is

playing, the display will change as follows:

CD:

Track Time →Album →Artist →Track Time

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Track time→Folder title →Artist →Song title →

Track number

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button:

Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK button

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The compact disc plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/TRACK button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one

track. Press the SEEK/TRACK button sev-

eral times to skip forward several tracks. If the last

track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the

disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

button (MP3/WMA CD only):

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, press the button once to view the

track list and again to view the folder list. To select

a folder or track, turn the TUNE/MENU knob to

scroll through the folders/songs and press the

ENTER button to make a selection.

RPT button

When the RPT button (Preset station number 1)

is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the

Repeat mode is toggled.

RDM button:

When the RDM button (Preset station number 2)

is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the

Random mode is toggled.

CD EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation without Navigation System” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) connection port (models without

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System” in

this section.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

A) (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. RPT button

3. RDM button

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/CAT buttons

7. APPS button

8. BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING button and

TUNE/SCROLL control knob

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11. VOL (volume) knob / (power) button

12. DISP button

13. MEDIA button

14. XM button*

15. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

XM button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

LHA3017

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) button

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,

CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio USB or iPod®) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off.

To turn the system off, press the (power)

button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the

Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options

and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to

make a selection.

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of

the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-

creases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides

no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Allows the user to set time manually.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item

to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to

the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

CLOCK.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “set

time”.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

hours.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

8. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust min-

utes.

9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

10. Press the BACK button to finish.

APPS button:

Press the APPS button to launch the Smart-

phone Integration Mode. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in

this section.

For additional information, refer to the

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system without

Navigation (Type B)” in this section.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on

the screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-

matically changes from stereo to monaural re-

ception.

XM band select:

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will

come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ control knob is pressed ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite

radio reception will not be available unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve

stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6

for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the

satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button, or choose

the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using

the XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until the preset number is updated on the

display and the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with text information. Depending

on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-

tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-

played.

The track number and the total number of tracks

in the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The compact disc plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT

button several times to skip backward sev-

eral tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK/CAT button several times

to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on

a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is

played. If the last track in a folder of an

MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a com-

pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on

the screen unless no pattern is applied.

EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc

is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will

reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation without Navigation System” in this sec-

tion.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) connection port (models without

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio without Navigation System” in

this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

B) (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. Backward seek button and

Forward seek button

6. BACK button

7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button

8. Display screen

9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control

knob

10. CD button

11. SXM button*

*No satellite radio reception is available when the

SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio

stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control

knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the ON-OFF button while the

system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,

Bluetooth® audio USB or iPod®) that was play-

ing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button.

LHA2895

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-

sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

Audio settings

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the following

items to the desired setting:

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-

hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to

vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are

Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust. When the desired

item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not

pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and other

information are displayed on the screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the

screen during FM stereo reception. When the ste-

reo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automati-

cally changes from stereo to monaural reception.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change the band as

follows:

SXM1* →SXM2* →SXM3*→SXM1* (satellite,

if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while the igni-

tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on when

the ON-OFF button is pressed.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is

active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation

can be controlled through the touch-screen.

Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of

channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to

change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”

key to display a list of categories. Touch a cat-

egory displayed on the list to display options

within that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned

using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual tuner,

touch the “Tune” key on the lower right corner of the

screen. A screen appears with a bar running from

low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on

the right. Touch the screen at the location of the

frequency you wish to tune and the station will

change to that frequency. To return to the regular

radio display screen, touch the “OK” key.

Tuning with the TUNE control knob

The radio can also be manually tuned using the

TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the

TUNE control knob to the left for lower frequen-

cies or to the right for higher frequencies. When

in SXM mode, turn the TUNE control knob to

change the channel.

SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the seek

buttons or to tune from low to high

or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

When in SXM mode, press the seek

buttons or to change the category.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for

FM1 and six for FM2) and six stations can be set

for the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for

the SXM band (six for SXM1, six for SXM2 and six

for SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or choose

the radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using

the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the de-

sired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a

beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Presets can also be selected by touching the

desired preset number on the screen.

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so

equipped):

The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to

designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and

SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any

of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the

current track on that station will play from the

beginning of the song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

LHA2899 LHA3085

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)

or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an

available preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 station

memory operations” in this section.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioning only

after the audio unit is turned on for a few

minutes.

• Tune Start is supported for music chan-

nels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to

replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired

track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay

Screen is prompted.

RE-

PLAY

To replay a track from the

beginning, press the seek

button. The user can continue to

press the seek button to

replay previous songs, but can

only go back as far as the sys-

tem permits. The system will

warn the user when they cannot

skip any further back by display-

ing “At the End” in the bottom

left corner of the screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press the

track button. “Live” will appear in

the bottom left corner of the

screen indicating the difference

from play time to live audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press

the pause button.

LHA3087

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REWIND/

FAST

FOR-

WARD

To rewind/ fast forward a track,

hold the or seek/

track button.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact disc

will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is

being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,

album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Ran-

dom” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel

Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”

alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the

display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted

Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin

playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-

low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

SEEK (Reverse or Fast

Forward) buttons

Press and hold the seek buttons or

for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing

to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When the but-

ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-

mal play speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the SEEK

button several times to skip backward sev-

eral tracks.

Press the SEEK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK button several times to

skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a

CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played.

If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop

computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-

patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.

EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and

the last source will be played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the

disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player

operation with Navigation System” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) connection port (models with

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio with Navigation System” in this

section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

LHA3037

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information.

The USB connection port is located in the center

console. Insert the USB device into the port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX or USB button (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX or USB button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is playing

or another audio source is plugged in through the

AUX IN jack, the AUX or USB button toggles

between the three sources.

MEDIA button (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to switch to

the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another

audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN

jack located in the center console, the MEDIA

button toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played

can be displayed on the display screen of the

vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the

audio files are encoded, information such as

Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total tracks in

the folder are displayed on the screen as well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on

the USB device is playing to reverse or fast

forward the track being played. The track plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the audio

file returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while an audio

file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder

will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while an audio

file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-

peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-

cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is

displayed on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-

turn to the first track on the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models with

Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information.

The USB connection port is located in the center

console. Insert the USB device into the port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the connection port, compatible audio files

on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system.

LHA3037

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio file operation

AUX (auxiliary) button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

playing and a USB connection port device is

inserted, press the AUX button until the center

display changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, press the ON-OFF button

to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being played is

shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s

audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list

of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the

name of a song on the screen to begin playing

that song.

Seeking buttons

Press the button while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to return to the beginning

of the current track. Press the button sev-

eral times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the button while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to advance one track.

Press the button several times to skip for-

ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on

the USB device is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play

pattern to the USB device. When the random

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-

dom mode, touch the “Random” key until

no icon is displayed.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the repeat

mode is active, the icon is displayed to the

left of the song title or album name to denote

which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon

is displayed.

LHA2923

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information regarding the proper

use and care of the device, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located in the center console. Con-

nect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the

iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB

connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection port, its

battery will be charged while connected to the

vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3

or later)

●iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version

1.1.2PC or later)

●iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version

2.0.1PC or later)

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3PC or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0PC or later)

LHA3037

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.0.2PC or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firm-

ware version 1.0.1PC or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.2PC or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.1PC or later)

●iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.2.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 2.2.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 3.1.3 or later)

●iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 4.3.5 or later)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)

●iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, press the AUX or MEDIA button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® is

playing, the iPod® plays when the audio system

is turned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the AUX or

MEDIA button turns the audio system on and

plays the iPod®.

If the audio system is on, the audio system auto-

matically begins playing tracks from the iPod®

when it is plugged into the jack.

SEEK/CAT buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to

skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons

or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing

to reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The track plays at an increased speed while

reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the track returns to normal play speed.

(RPT) REPEAT

When the RPT button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-

peated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-

peated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

(RDM) RANDOM

When the RDM button is pressed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle →

Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be

played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will

be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it re-

turns to the previous menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

MEDIA button

Press the MEDIA button while the iPod® is con-

nected to show the iPod® operation menu on the

audio display. Scroll through the menu list using

the TUNE/FOLDER knob. Press the

ENTER/SETTING button to select a menu item.

Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in

the following order:

●Now playing

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Songs

●Podcasts

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Shuffle songs

For additional information, refer to the iPod®

Owner’s Manual.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB port

located in the center console. Connect the

iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®

and the USB end of the cable to the USB port on

the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a

USB connection, its battery will be charged while

connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position.

LHA3037

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from

the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

●iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.0 or later)

●iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.1 or later)

●iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ver-

sion 2.0.4 or later)

●iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 4.2.1 or later)*

●iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

●iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1 or later)

●iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3 or later)

●iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.4 or later)

●iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2 or later)

●iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-

sion 1.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

●iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

●iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully

functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to

the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control

knob will start the iPod®.

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the system

off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn

on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod®

is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until

the center display changes to the iPod® mode.

LHA2911

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to

the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen,

BACK button or the TUNE knob to navigate the

menus on the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key

to bring up the iPod® interface.

Depending on the iPod® model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For additional information about each item, refer

to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Genres

●Songs

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode

Item Result

Shuffle and repeat play mode While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly.

Shuffle Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod®. When the shuffle mode is active it will

appear on the screen. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key until it is not displayed.

Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is active it will ap-

pear on the screen. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until it is not displayed.

LHA2907

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Seek buttons

Press the SEEK button or to skip

backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK button or

for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse

or fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released, the

track returns to normal play speed.

Scrolling menus:

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or

songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll

the list by the first character in the name. To

activate character indexing, touch and hold the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.

Turn the TUNE knob to choose the number or

letter to jump to in the list and then press the

ENTER button.

If no character is selected after 2 seconds, the

display returns to normal.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

TYPE A (if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers. For additional

information, refer to “FM/AM radio with compact

disc (CD) player (Type A).”

NOTE:

For additional information regarding

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the

Cellular Phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press and hold the button on the au-

dio unit or the on the steering wheel.

2. Enter the PIN number on the screen into the

device to be connected.

3. If the pairing is successful, the device name

will come up on the screen

LHA2279

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

NOTE:

Some phones may not require a PIN num-

ber in order to connect.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the USB/AUX button on the audio unit repeatedly

until the BT AUDIO is displayed on the screen.

NOTE:

When a Bluetooth® audio device is con-

nected to the system, audio function can

only be controlled through the device.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(Type B) (if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button. The system an-

nounces the available commands.

2. Say “Add Phone”. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

connecting from the phone handset. The

connecting procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone

model. For additional information, refer to

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-

tails. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissancanada.com/bluetooth for in-

structions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

3. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the AUX or MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

Use the vehicle audio controls or the Bluetooth®

device’s controls to play, pause, skip or reverse

tracks.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset. The connecting procedure

of the cellular phone varies according to

each cellular phone model. See the cellular

phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissancanada.com/bluetooth for in-

structions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®

audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-

played on the screen.

LHA2924 LHA2844

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

1. SOURCE select switch

2. Tuning switch

3. Volume control switch

LHA0049

Type A (if so equipped)

LHA2054

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SOURCE select switch

Push the source select switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →XM1 (satellite radio, if so

equipped) →XM2 (satellite radio, if so equipped)

→XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) →CD* →

USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) →Bluetooth® Au-

dio* (if so equipped) →AUX* →AM.

* These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device or

connected to the system.

Volume control switches

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

For most audio sources, pressing the switches

for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different

function than pressing for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to increase or decrease the preset

station.

●Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next

station.

XM (if so equipped):

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to increase or decrease the preset

station.

●Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous

category.

iPod® (if so equipped):

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to increase or decrease the track num-

ber.

Type B (if so equipped)

LHA3052

Type C (if so equipped)

LHA3636

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

CD:

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to increase or decrease the track num-

ber.

●Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

folder number (if playing compressed audio

files).

USB (if so equipped):

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to increase or decrease the track num-

ber.

●Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

folder number.

Bluetooth®Audio (if so equipped):

●Push the switch for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to skip ahead or back to the next song.

●Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the

current song.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod

clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

●Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle operation.

●Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

●Be sure to fold down the antenna be-

fore the vehicle enters a garage with a

low ceiling.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Inte-

gration technology. This allows many compatible

Smartphone applications to be displayed and

easily controlled through the vehicle’s touch-

screen.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registration

is required to use mobile applications or to

access connected features of certain ve-

hicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is

necessary for the user to register. In order to

Mobile Apps

website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or

https://canada.nissanconnect.com and sign up

or create an account through the prompts on the

NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once registered,

download the NissanConnect Mobile Apps from

your compatible phone’s application download

source and then log into the application. If you

already have an account created through the

App, please log in.

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

(if so equipped)

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONNECT PHONE

To use this feature, a compatible smartphone

must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the

vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System without Navigation System (Type

B)” in this section.

NOTE:

For vehicles with Navigation, Apple

iPhones®must be plugged in via USB for

NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function.

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

plugged in via USB.

NOTE:

For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-

bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

paired via Bluetooth®.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Once connected, the NissanConnect Mobile

App will search your phone to determine which

compatible applications are currently installed.

The user will then choose which apps they want

to bring into their vehicle from the list of apps

within the “Manage My Apps” section of the

NissanConnect Mobile App on their smartphone.

The vehicle will then download the in-vehicle

interface for each of these compatible applica-

tions. Once downloaded, the user can access

their selected smartphone applications through

the vehicle display. For additional information on

application availability visit www.nissanusa.com/

connect/ or www.canada.nissanconnect.com

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harnesses. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the previously connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If

your phone does not connect automatically

to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s

Manual for details on device operation.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the hands-free

phone system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting instruc-

tions.

LHA3627

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the /

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button is pressed before the initialization com-

pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free

phone system not ready” and will not react to

voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the / button located on

the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak

a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command is

said exactly as prompted by the system and

repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-

sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

●In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the / button on the

steering wheel.

●To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

press the / button and after the

tone say, “Call Redial.”

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following rules and examples.

●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

●Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred”

●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continue en-

tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “Six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “Six two zero zero”

●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-

able when using the “Special Number” com-

mand and the “Send” command during a

call).

For additional information, refer to “List of

voice commands” and “Special number” in

this section.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Number” command).

●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available

only when storing a phonebook number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please use the “Help” command to get

information on how to use the system.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the voice recognition system, the

system voice can be interrupted to allow the user

to speak commands. While the system is speak-

ing, press the / button on the steer-

ing wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone

will be heard. After the tone, speak desired com-

mand (displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the / button and after the tone say,

“Call Redial”.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the / button to

initiate a VR session or answer an

incoming call.

You can also use the /

button to interrupt the system

feedback and give a command at

once. For additional information,

refer to “List of voice commands”

and “During a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition system

is active, press and hold the

button for 5 seconds to quit the

voice recognition system at any

time.

TUNING SWITCH

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the

phone system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “List of voice com-

mands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System using English, Spanish or

French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the / button for

more than 5 seconds.

Type A (if so equipped)

LHA3002

Type B (if so equipped)

LHA3095

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( / ) button for

the hands-free phone system to enter the

voice adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For additional information, refer to “Voice

adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the lan-

guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in

French). To select the current language,

press the PHONE/SEND ( / )

button. To select a different language, tilt the

tuning switch ( or ) up or down.

NOTE:

You must press the / button

within 5 seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will

not be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” 䊊

“Add phone” 䊊

Initiate from handset 䊊

Name phone 䊊

1. Press the / button on the steer-

ing wheel. The system announces the avail-

able commands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊

A. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

connecting from the phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional information, refer

to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You

can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions

on connecting NISSAN recommended cellu-

lar phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone 䊊

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

Main Menu

“Call” 䊊

“Phone Number” 䊊

Speak the digits 䊊

“Dial” 䊊

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Press the / button on the steer-

ing wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” 䊊

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊

B. The system ac-

knowledges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format 䊊

C.Ifthe

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five

five five” as the 1st group, then “one two

one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

10 digits or any special characters, say

“Special Number”. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “How to say numbers” in this

section.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and an-

nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” 䊊

D. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional information, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

/ button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button

on the steering wheel.

For additional information, refer to “List of voice

commands” in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the /

button on the steering wheel, you can choose

from the commands on the Main Menu. The fol-

lowing pages describe these commands and the

commands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear

the list of commands currently available any time

the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,

you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) 䊊

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) 䊊

“Special Number” 䊊

“Redial” 䊊

“Call Back” 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

(Speak name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you

can dial a number associated with a name.

For additional information, refer to “Phonebook

(phones without automatic phonebook download

function)” in this section.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry you wish to call. The system

acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple numbers associated with the

name, the system asks you to choose the correct

number.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,

the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) 䊊

When prompted by the system, say the number

you wish to call. For additional information, refer

to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by

entering a phone number” in this section.

“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special

characters, say “Special Number”. When the

system acknowledges the command, the system

will prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System

session.

“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of

the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back” and

ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System

session.

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Press the / button on the

steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and

enter commands.

●“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

●“Send” — Use the Send command to enter

numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For ex-

ample, if you were directed to dial an exten-

sion by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-

sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,

Say “pound” for “#”.

●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-

mand to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to

the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem, press the / button.

●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

“Delete Entry” 䊊

“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic down-

load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® pro-

file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-

ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each

phone connected to the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you

would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then prompts

you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

For additional information, refer to “How to say

numbers” in this section.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the transfer

from the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via the Bluetooth® communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. For additional information, refer to

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

The system repeats the number and prompts you

for the next command. When you have finished

entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one

entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-

ognizes the command, speak the name to delete

or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

SayaName

“List Names” 䊊

“Record Name” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of

the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-

tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the

name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of

that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names for

each phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For additional information,

refer to “Record name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. For

additional information, refer to “Record name” in

this section.

“Record Name” 䊊

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that the

vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can

also be used to record voice tags to directly dial

an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice

tags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” 䊊

“Incoming” 䊊

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-

going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to

the vehicle that were not answered.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” 䊊

“Select Phone” 䊊

“Delete Phone” 䊊

“Replace Phone” 䊊

“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊

“Display Settings” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable

the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-

tem will list the names assigned to each phone

and then prompt you for the phone you wish to

delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also

delete the phonebook for that phone.

“Replace Phone” 䊊

Use the Replace Phone command to replace an

existing phone pairing with a new phone. The

system will keep all voice tags assigned to your

phonebook.

“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a

wireless connection to your phone.

“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊

Use the Phonebook Download OFF command to

turn off the automatic downloading of the hand-

set phonebook to the available (if supported by

the cellular phone). When the command is rec-

ognized, “Sync Contacts OFF” will appear on the

audio display.

To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook

Download”. When the command is recognized,

“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio

display.

“Display Settings” 䊊

Use the Display Settings command to control

where incoming call notifications are displayed in

the vehicle. Say “Driver Only” to have call notifi-

cations shown on the vehicle information display

only. Say “Both” to have call notifications shown

on both the vehicle information display and the

center audio display.

To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook

Download”. When the command is recognized,

“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio

display.

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE

Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect

users to train the system to improve recognition

accuracy. By repeating a number of commands,

the users can create a voice model of their own

voice that is stored in the system. The system is

capable of storing a different voice adaptation

model for each connected phone.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-

ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-

sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the / button for

more than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( / ) button for

the hands-free phone system to enter the

voice adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-

ferent language.”

5. Press the / button.

For additional information, refer to “Choos-

ing a language” in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the / but-

ton.

8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that voice adap-

tation has been completed and the system is

ready.

The VA mode will stop if:

●The / button is pressed for

more than 5 seconds in VA mode.

●The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the VA mode, the system instructs the

trainer to say the following phrases. The system

will prompt you for each phrase.

●phonebook transfer entry

●dial three oh four two nine

●delete call back number

●incoming

●transfer entry

●eight pause nine three two pause seven

●delete all entries

●call seven two four zero nine

●phonebook delete entry

●next entry

●dial star two one seven oh

●yes

●no

●select

●missed

●dial eight five six nine two

●Bluetooth on

●outgoing

●call three one nine oh two

●nine seven pause pause three oh eight

●cancel

●call back number

●call star two zero nine five

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●delete phone

●dial eight three zero five one

●record name

●four three pause two nine pause zero

●delete redial number

●phonebook list names

●call eight oh five four one

●correction

●connect phone

●dial seven four oh one eight

●previous entry

●delete

●dial nine seven two six six

●call seven six three oh one

●go back

●call five six two eight zero

●dial six six four three seven

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. This can be especially helpful if the

noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice

recognition system to accurately interpret com-

mands. The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user may

select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent

Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit

the manual control mode by pressing and holding

the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that time,

pressing the PHONE/SEND ( / )

button will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

●To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when

manual controls are initially activated.

●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning

() switch up or down. The system will

always speak the current menu option. De-

pending on the audio display, it will also

show the current menu option.

●To select the current menu option, press the

PHONE/SEND ( / ) button.

●To go back to the previous menu, press the

PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current

menu is the Main Menu, pressing the

PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the

Phone system.

●To exit the manual control mode, press and

hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for

5 seconds.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-

prove the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in

this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

LHA3628

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the previously connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If

your phone does not connect automatic

ally to the system, consult the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details on device op-

eration.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the hands-free

phone system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth

or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting instruc-

tions.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition (VR) system, observe the fol-

lowing:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

●If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

●If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command is

said exactly as prompted by the system and

repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-

tion” any time the system is waiting for a

response.

●You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-

sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing

the button on the steering wheel. After

interrupting the system, wait for a beep before

speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate

a VR session or answer an incom-

ing call.

You can also use the button

to interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once. For

additional information, refer to

“Voice commands” and “During a

call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition sys-

tem is active, press and hold

the button for 5 seconds to

quit the voice recognition system

at any time.

Tuning switch

While using the voice recognition

system, tilt the tuning switch up or

down to manually control the

phone system.

LHA2499

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be cancelled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System:

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER

button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the

connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-

ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended

cellular phones.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press

the button and say “Phone” to bring up the

phone command menu. The available options

are:

●Call

●Phonebook

●Recent Calls

●Messaging (if available)

●Show Applications (if available)

●Select Phone

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making a call”

in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available under

“Phonebook”:

●(a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a

list of options for that phonebook entry. The

system will say the name it interpreted based

on the voice command provided. If the name

is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another

name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is identi-

fied, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that number.

Say “Record Name” to record a name for the

phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to

delete a recorded name for the phonebook

entry.

●List Names

Speak this command to have the system list

the names in the phonebook one by one

alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number

of the current name or “Send Text” to send a

text message to that number. Say “Next En-

try” or “Previous Entry” to move through the

list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to

record a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phonebook

entry.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available under

“Recent Calls”:

●Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the incoming call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of incoming calls.

●Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from

an entry in the phonebook, the name will be

displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of

the missed call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of missed calls.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call

was to an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the outgoing call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

●Redial

Speak this command to call the last number

dialed.

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the number of

the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging”

Speak this command to access text messaging

functions. For additional information, refer to

“Text messaging” in this section.

“Show Applications”

Speak this command to display list of smart-

phone apps available.

NOTE:

Compatible smartphone and registration

necessary to access applications. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Nissan-

Connect

with Mobile Apps” in this sec-

tion.

“Select Phone”

Speak this command to select a phone to use

from a list of those phones connected to the

vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to the

vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem:

NOTE:

Available commands different if system is

in Manual Control mode. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Manual Control” in this

section.

1. Press the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice commands

to continue:

●“(a name)” — Speak the name of a phone-

book entry to place a call to that entry. The

system will respond with the name it inter-

preted from your command and will prompt

you to confirm that the name is correct. Say

“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-

other name from the phonebook.

●“List Names” – Speak this command to have

the system list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Next Entry”

or “Previous Entry” to move through the list

alphabetically. Say “Select” once desired

contact is heard and displayed on screen.

Say “Dial” to dial the number of the current

name or say “Record Name” to record a

name for the current phonebook entry to be

assigned.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

●“Phone Number” — Speak this command to

place a call by inputting numbers. For 7– to

10–digit phone number, speak the numbers.

Say “Correction” at any time in the process

to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted

number. For phone numbers with more dig-

its or special characters, say “Special Num-

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits

can be entered. Available special characters

are “start”, “pound”, “plus”, and “pause”.

When finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call.

Say “Correction” at any time in the process

to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted

number or character.

●“Redial” – Speak this command to dial the

number of the last outgoing call. The system

will display “Re-dialing <name/number>”.

The name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the num-

ber being re-dialed will be displayed.

●“Call Back” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last incoming call. The

system will display “Calling back

<name/number>”. The name of the phone-

book entry will be displayed if it available,

otherwise the number being called back will

be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone connected

to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, the call information is displayed on either

the vehicle information display or both the vehicle

information display and he control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button to

access additional options. Speak one of the fol-

lowing commands:

●“(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then say

“Send” or say “Correction” to change the

numbers entered.

●“Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-

mand to mute or unmute the system.

●“Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To transfer

the call back from the handset to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,

press the button and confirm when

prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting

functionality. If a call is received while another call

is already active, a message will be displayed on

the screen. Press the button to hold the

active call and switch to the second call. Press

the button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same commands

that are available during any call and additional

commands:

●“Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold

the second call and switch back to the origi-

nal call.

●“End Other Call” – Speak this command to

stay with the second call and end the original

call.

Press the button to accept the call. Press

the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check lo-

cal regulations before using the

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if the

connected device does not support the

Message Access Profile (MAP). See the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to your phone’s Owner’s Manual.

Text message integration requires that the

phone support MAP (Message Access Pro-

file) for both receiving and sending text

messages. Some phones may not support

all text messaging features. Please see

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s Own-

er’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●(a name)

●Number

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

●Missed Calls

For additional information, refer to “Voice

commands” in this section.

4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Five

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following:

●“Driving, can’t text”

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging ”.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on

the steering wheel to scroll through all text mes-

sages if more than one are available. Press

the button to exit the text message screen.

Press the button to access the following

options for replying to the text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER but-

ton:

●Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

●Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

LHA2274

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the displayed

list. The system will ask to confirm before

deleting the phone.

●Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the displayed

list. When a selection is made, the system

will ask to confirm before proceeding. The

recorded phonebook for the phone being

deleted will be saved as long as the new

phone’s phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

●Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously connected

phone from the displayed list.

●Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call

information displayed only in the vehicle in-

formation display. Select “Both” to have in-

coming call information displayed in both the

vehicle information display and the center

display screen.

●Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic down-

load of a connected phone’s phonebook.

●Text Message

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

●New Text Sound

Select to adjust the volume of the sound that

plays when a new text is received by a phone

connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System. The setting all the way to the

left indicates that the new text sound will be

muted.

●Show Incoming Text

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text

messages displayed only in the vehicle infor-

mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-

ing text messages displayed in both the ve-

hicle information display and the center

display screen. Select “None” to have no

display of incoming text messages.

●Edit Custom Messages

Select to set a custom message that will be

available with the standard options when

sending a text message. To set a custom

message, send a text message to your own

phone number while the phone is connected

to the system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be set

while the vehicle is stationary.

●Auto Reply

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-

tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-

matically send a predefined text message to

the sender when a text message is received

while driving.

●Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is sent

when the Auto Reply function is enabled.

Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three

custom messages stored in the system.

●Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the vehicle

signature is added to outgoing text mes-

sages from the vehicle. This message can-

not be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. The manual control mode does not

allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-

cent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition,

exit the manual control mode by pressing and

holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that

time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

LHA3629

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

phone module when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position with the connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-

tem” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be impos-

sible to receive a call for a short period of

time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-

ing help if the hands-free phone system

seems to be malfunctioning.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers. Stor-

ing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

●The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-

quirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to

Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice

Recognition System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the voice recognition system, the

system voice can be interrupted to allow the user

to speak commands. While the system is speak-

ing, press the button on the steering

wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will

be heard. After the tone, speak desired command

(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be cancelled.

1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

LHA3622

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Initiate the connecting process from the

handset. The system will display the mes-

sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your

Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed

on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to

complete the pairing process.

For additional information, refer to the

Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed

list.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on

the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-

aling.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the

“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the

screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a

letter or number and then press ENTER.

The list will move to the first entry that

begins with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control panel.

The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis-

play.

2. Select one of the following options to make a

call:

●“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry

stored in the vehicle phonebook.

●“Call Lists”: Select the name from the in-

coming, outgoing or missed.

●“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the

vehicle.

●“”: Input the phone number manually

using a keypad displayed on the screen. For

additional information, refer to “How to use

the touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected phone,

the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the green phone icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:

●Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

●Touch the red phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options are

available on the screen:

●“Handset”

Select this option to switch control of the

phone call over to the handset.

●“Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the microphone.

Select again to unmute the microphone.

●Red phone ( ) icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the red phone ( )

icon on the screen or press the button on

the steering wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check lo-

cal regulations before using the

feature.

●Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications and

features, such as social networking and

texting. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

●Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe location.

If you have to use the feature while

driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while using the text

messaging feature, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®

menu for text messages to appear on the

headunit. For additional information, refer

to the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

Text message integration requires that the

phone support MAP (Message Access Pro-

file) for both receiving and sending text

messages. Some phones may not support

all text messaging features. Consult a

NISSAN dealer or visit a NISSAN owner

portal for details regarding phone compat-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipi-

ent of the text message. Choose from the

following:

●To (a name)

●Enter Number

●Missed Calls

●Incoming Calls

●Outgoing Calls

For additional information, refer to “Voice

commands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Nine

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following after the tone:

●“Driving, can’t text”

●“Call me”

●“On my way”

●“Running late”

●“Okay”

●“Yes”

●“No”

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●“Where are you?”

●“When?”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired cus-

tom message. For additional information, re-

fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the button to exit the

text message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

●Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

●Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

●Read Text

Speak this command to read the text mes-

sage again.

●Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previ-

ous text message (if available).

●Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

LHA2844

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.

Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust

the following settings as desired:

●Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are alpha-

betically displayed on the screen.

●Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-

book. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on

the SIM card. Touch “Both” to use both

sources.

●Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to the

vehicle from the chosen source.

●Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phonebook

entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog-

nition System.

●Phone Notifications for:

Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications

shown in the vehicle information display.

Touch “Both” to have phone notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen.

●Text Messaging:

Touch to toggle the text message function-

ality on or off.

●Show Incoming Text for:

Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-

cations shown in the vehicle information dis-

play. Touch “Both” to have text notifications

shown in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to

turn off all text notifications.

●Auto Reply:

Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality

on or off.

●Auto Reply Message:

Touch to indicate preferred message to be

sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.

●Use Vehicle’s Signature:

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the

vehicle signature to outgoing messages.

●Custom Text Messages:

Touch this option to select a custom mes-

sage to edit. There are 4 customer message

slots available.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the systems equipped on

this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation

systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

the button located on the steering wheel.

When prompted, speak the command for the

system you wish to activate. The command given

is picked up by the microphone and performed

when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice response and a

message in the center display to inform you of the

command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-

tem is ready to accept voice commands. If

the button is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice

Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a cat-

egory like phone or a command like points of

interest followed by a brand name”. A list of

available commands is then spoken by the

system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on

the display changes, speak a command.

Available commands are discussed in this

section.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided

when the command is accepted.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces: “Command not recog-

nized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

●If you want to cancel the command or go

back to the previous menu of commands,

press the button. The system will an-

nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or

“Go back” depending on the current menu

level.

●Press the BACK button on the control panel

to move back through the menus displayed

on the screen.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, use the volume control switches

on the steering wheel or the volume knob on

the control panel.

●The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel display:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA2522

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-

onds after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-

lowing systems:

●Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

●Navigation

●Audio

●Information

●My Apps

●Help

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the following

example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number

and then speak the phone number in any of the

following formats:

●“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”

●“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-

sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,

full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For

example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousand”.

LHA2780

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle

phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say

“Phone” to access various phone com-

mands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would

you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and the

vehicle is stationary, the system announces:

“There is no phone connected. Would you like to

connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a

phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to

“On”, the following voice commands are available:

●Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in which you

are trying to call. System will confirm correct

contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

●Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After

the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate

dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the num-

ber entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the

main menu.

●List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts

for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call

the number of the phonebook entry. Say

“Send Text” to send a text message to the

number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next

Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, where the same op-

tions will then be available.

●Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional com-

mand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”

or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such

calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry displayed on

the screen to dial that number or say “Next

Page” to view entries on the next page (if

available).

●Redial

Redials the last called number.

●Read Text

Reads an incoming text message. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation

System” in this section.

●Send Text

Sends a text message. For additional infor-

mation , refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System with Navigation System” in

this section.

●Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual con-

trols to continue”. Use manual controls to

change the active phone from among the

listed phones connected to the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the Navigation System:

●Street Address (address)

●Points of Interest (name)

●POI by Category

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Home

●Address Book

●Previous Destinations

●Enter Address in Steps

●Cancel Route

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the following avail-

able commands:

●Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

●Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM

frequency

●Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM

frequency

●SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

●CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

●Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

●Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

●Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to be

played

For additional information, refer to “Audio sys-

tem” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the information functions of the Navigation Sys-

tem:

●Traffic

●Fuel Prices

●Stocks

●Movie Listings

●Current Weather

●Weather Map

●5 — day Forecast

●6 — hour Forecast

For additional information, refer to the Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this voice

command. For additional information, refer to

“NissanConnect

Mobile Apps” in this section.

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be spoken to

have the system provide instructions and tips for

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

●List Commands

●What Can I Say?

●General Help

●Quit

●Exit

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, follow the solutions given in this guide

for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are

listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting

with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command Not

Recognized” or the system fails to rec-

ognize the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(if so equipped) ................................5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-6

Off-road recovery...............................5-6

Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-7

Ignition switch (if so equipped)......................5-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(if so equipped) ................................5-8

Manual transmission (if so equipped) .............5-9

Ignition switch positions .........................5-9

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ................................5-9

Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) ........5-10

Operating range...............................5-11

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . .........5-11

Emergency engine shut off .....................5-12

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge.......5-12

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ...............................5-13

Before starting the engine .........................5-13

Starting the engine ...............................5-13

Driving the vehicle ................................5-14

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(if so equipped) ...............................5-14

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-18

Parking brake ....................................5-20

Cruise control (if so equipped) . . ...................5-21

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-21

Cruise control operations.......................5-22

Break-in schedule ................................5-23

Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-23

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-24

Parking/parking on hills............................5-25

Power steering ...................................5-26

Brake system ....................................5-26

Brake precautions .............................5-26

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-27

Brake assist ..................................5-28

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-28

Brake force distribution ........................5-30

Cold weather driving..............................5-31

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-31

Antifreeze.....................................5-31

Battery .......................................5-31

Draining of coolant water .......................5-31

Tire equipment ................................5-31

Special winter equipment.......................5-31

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-31

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-32

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the rear vent windows, doors and

trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while

driving, otherwise exhaust gases could

be drawn into the passenger compart-

ment. If you must drive with one of

these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Turn the air recirculation mode off

and set the fan speed control to the

highest level to circulate the air.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

Starting and driving 5-3

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted for all 4 tires. After the tires are

inflated to the recommended pressure, the

vehicle must be driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and

turn off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

●The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed in the odometer when

the low tire pressure warning light is illumi-

nated and low tire pressure is detected. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns

off when the low tire pressure warning light

turns off.

●The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message

is not displayed if the low tire pressure warn-

ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-

function.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates, check

the tire pressure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label, located on the driver’s door

opening, to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (Refer to “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.)

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert (if so

equipped)

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and

audible signals outside the vehicle to help you

inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift

lever into the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators

will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached,

the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-

tors stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

●If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-

proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3

times. To correct the pressure, push the

core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to

release pressure. When the pressure

reaches the designated pressure, the

horn beeps once.

●If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that

the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

Starting and driving 5-5

●The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external

device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device

is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-

tem.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-

ard indicators.

– The identification code of the tire pres-

sure sensor is not registered to the sys-

tem.

– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is

low.

●If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate

due to TPMS interference, move the ve-

hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward

and try again.

If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire

pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when

tired. Never drive when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-

the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-

ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in

the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

5-6 Starting and driving

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the

vehicle by following the procedure below. Please

note that this procedure is only a general guide.

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is

true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)

and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability to

operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

●Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK position

while driving. The steering wheel will

lock. This may cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle and could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position

until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

●When placing the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, make sure that the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

●When removing the key from the ignition

switch (if it is inserted), make sure that the

shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed to the

LOCK position:

1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the ON

direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition

switch.

If the ignition switch is placed to the LOCK posi-

tion, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P

(Park) position.

The shift lever can be moved if the ignition

switch is in the ON position and the foot

brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position 䊊

1between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

SSD0392

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

5-8 Starting and driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-

ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, place the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK position. Remove

the key. To unlock the steering wheel, in-

sert the key and turn it gently while rotating

the steering wheel slightly right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

WSD0052

Starting and driving 5-9

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-

tive times in quick succession or the igni-

tion switch is pushed and held for more

than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while

the vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal

(MT), the ignition switch position will illuminate as

follows:

Push center

●once to change to ACC.

●two times to change to ON.

●three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or

closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to OFF until

the shift lever is moved into the P (Park) position

or N (Neutral) position (MT).

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-

ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position

or N (Neutral) position (MT).

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch

position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF

position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed in the meter. For additional information,

refer to “Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if

so equipped)

5-10 Starting and driving

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition

switch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the

glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the

Intelligent Key may not function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted

in the port.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is

opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when

the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,

such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-

utes under the following conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any

of the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

●Ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle

is not running, after some time under the follow-

ing condition:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

WSD0165

Starting and driving 5-11

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of

the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.

●Ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended pe-

riod. This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is

discharged, or environmental conditions interfere

with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the NISSAN

Intelligent Key ® as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the brake

pedal, the ignition switch position will change to

ACC.

NOTE:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system warn-

ing light may blink in yellow (on the

meter) even if the NISSAN Intelligent

Key® is inside the vehicle. This is not a

malfunction. To stop the warning light

from blinking, touch the ignition switch

with the NISSAN Intelligent Key®

again.

●If the NISSAN Intelligent Key® system

warning light in the meter is blinking in

green, replace the battery as soon as

possible. For additional information,

refer to “Battery replacement” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

SSD0860

5-12 Starting and driving

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped),

and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as

possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. CVT model

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition switch is

turned to the OFF position or if the key

is removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift lever is in any of the driving

positions.

Manual transmission model

Depress the clutch pedal to the floor, move

the shift lever to N (Neutral) position, and

crank the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the clutch pedal is fully de-

pressed.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

switch to START. Release the switch when

the engine starts. If the engine starts, but

fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-13

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it

and then crank the engine. Release the

switch and the accelerator pedal when

the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-

ing the ignition switch to START. Release

the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the ignition switch to off and

wait 10 seconds before cranking again,

otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could

cause an accident.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-14 Starting and driving

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and smooth

operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift lever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake

pedal MUST be depressed before shifting

from P (Park) to any drive position while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-

tions if the ignition switch is placed in the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is

removed.

To move the shift lever:

Push the button 䊊

Awhile depressing the

brake pedal

Push the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pushing button 䊊

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to

any of the desired shift positions.

LSD2013

Starting and driving 5-15

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC

position for any reason while the vehicle is in N

(Neutral), or any drive position, the key cannot be

turned to the LOCK position and be removed

from the ignition switch. If this occurs, perform

the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park the

vehicle and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position to remove the key.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move the

shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. R (Reverse)

speed is limited to 30 mph(48 km/h). Do not

exceed 30 mph(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button pushed

in to move the shift lever from P (Park), N

(Neutral) or any drive position to R (Re-

verse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low)

Use this position for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes

and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not

use the L (Low) position in any other circum-

stances.

5-16 Starting and driving

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not

be moved from the P (Park) position even with the

foot brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, perform the following

procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch into the LOCK po-

sition and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip ofa3mm

screwdriver, remove the shift lock release

cover.

●If available, a plastic trim tool can also be

used.

4. Push down the shift lock release using a

suitable tool.

5. Push the shift lever button and move the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position while hold-

ing down the shift lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

to unlock the steering wheel.

7. Release the parking brake.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired loca-

tion.

Replace the removed shift lock release cover

after the operation.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check the

continuously variable transmission system as

soon as possible.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the

shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the light

in the instrument panel illuminates. For additional

information, refer to “Overdrive OFF indicator

light (CVT models)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-

proved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive OFF mode, push the

O/D OFF switch again. The indicator light

will turn off.

LSD2194 LSD2012

Starting and driving 5-17

Each time the engine is started, or when the shift

lever is shifted to any position other than D

(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-

cally turned off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will

not be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The MIL may

come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is

activated. For additional information, refer

to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait for 10 seconds. Then

place the ignition switch back in the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does not

return to its normal operating condition,

have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-

sion and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially careful

when driving. If necessary, pull to the side

of the road at a safe place and allow the

transmission to return to normal opera-

tion, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-

ing to a lower gear. This may cause a

loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may cause clutch

damage.

●Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

●Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

●When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

5-18 Starting and driving

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into

the appropriate gear, then release the clutch

slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress

the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If

the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the

transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be

heard. Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in the 1 (1st) position and shift to

the 2 (2nd), 3 (3rd), 4 (4th) and 5 (5th) gear in

sequence according to the vehicle speed.

You cannot shift directly from 5th gear into R

(Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then into R

(Reverse).

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then

release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch

pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less

than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 9 (14)

2nd to 3rd 12 (19)

3rd to 4th 21 (34)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th —

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and

high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

Gear change mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th —

Suggested maximum speed in each

gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will en-

sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 29 (47)

2nd 53 (85)

3rd 78 (125)

4th —

5th —

LSD0128

Starting and driving 5-19

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up 䊊

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button 䊊

Band lower the

lever completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

WSD0048

PARKING BRAKE

5-20 Starting and driving

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically.

●To properly set the cruise control system,

use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depressing

the clutch pedal when the cruise control is

set. Should this occur, depress the clutch

pedal and turn the main switch off imme-

diately. Failure to do so may cause engine

damage.

Type A (if so equipped)

LSD2430

Type B (if so equipped)

WSD0231

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-21

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in

the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL button; the CRUISE in-

dicator light in the instrument panel goes

out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indicator

light goes out.

●Push the ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indi-

cator light in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the CRUISE light in the instrument panel goes

out if:

●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST

switch. The preset speed is deleted from

memory.

●the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission), or move the shift lever to N (Neu-

tral) (CVT).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

5-22 Starting and driving

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-

ommendations may result in shortened

engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy

from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

●Avoid rapid starts and stops.

●Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

●Maintain constant speed while commut-

ing and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

●Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-

mize stops.

●Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your number

of stops.

●Maintaining a steady speed can minimize

red light stops and improve fuel effi-

ciency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

●Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to open windows to cool the vehicle

due to reduced engine load.

●Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to

increased aerodynamic drag.

●Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

●Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally

allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due

to reduced aerodynamic drag.

●Maintaining a safe following distance be-

hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary

braking.

●Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced brak-

ing and smooth acceleration changes.

●Select a gear range suitable to road con-

ditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

●Using cruise control during highway driv-

ing helps maintain a steady speed.

●Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on flat

terrains.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-23

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

●Utilize a map or navigation system to de-

termine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

●Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

●Automated passes permit drivers to use

special lanes to maintain cruising speed

through the toll and avoid stopping and

starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

●Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel

economy.

●Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-

tively circulate the engine oil before driv-

ing.

●Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating

temperature more quickly while driving

versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

●Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-

proper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-24 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

CVT models or in an appropriate gear

for manual transmission models. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place

the shift lever in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models

Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assist while driving to operate the

steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power assist

is reduced, steering wheel operation will become

heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-

ing system goes down, the power assist level will

return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the power

steering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is

operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

If the electric power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may indicate

the power steering system is not functioning

properly and may need servicing. Have the power

steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be

no power assist for the steering, but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-26 Starting and driving

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

effect of the parking brake is weakened or when-

ever the brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are

replaced, in order to assure the best brake per-

formance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting from

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. It can help maintain vehicle con-

trol during braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than on

normal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-

ping distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or

if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the

driver is responsible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional in-

formation, refer to the ”Tire and load-

ing information label” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information”

section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do

not lock during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-

tion speed at each wheel and varies the brake

fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking

and sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-

ing, the system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-27

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6mph(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-

ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated

generating greater braking force than a conven-

tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-

ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain

driving conditions, the VDC System helps to per-

form the following functions:

●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

●Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following condi-

tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steer-

ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-28 Starting and driving

When the VDC system operates, the indi-

cator in the instrument panel flashes to note the

following:

●The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

●Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator

light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light comes on in the instrument panel.

The VDC system automatically turns off when the

indicator light is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-

cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to prevent

one drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will not

flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to ON

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and both the

and indicator light may

illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the and

the indicator light may illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-29

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the

system optimizes the distribution of force to each

of the four wheels depending on the radius of the

turn.

WARNING

●

The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not pre-

vent accidents due to abrupt steering op-

eration at high speeds or by careless or

dangerous driving techniques. Reduce

vehicle speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slippery

surfaces and always drive carefully.

●The active trace control and brake force

distribution systems may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

●

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If

suspension parts such as shock absorb-

ers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bush-

ings and wheels are not NISSAN recom-

mended for your vehicle or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance, and

the VDC warning light may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warning

light may illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC warning light may

illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the VDC warning light may illu-

minate. Do not drive on these types of

roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the VDC warning light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Restart

the engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the VDC warning light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

5-30 Starting and driving

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole, or use the remote keyless entry key fob or

the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For

additional information, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-

tery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Changing

engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please

consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability informa-

tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-31

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or

a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-

ously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

5-32 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off (Push-button ignition

models only) ......................................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(if so equipped) ................................6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-3

Jump starting ....................................6-12

Push starting.....................................6-14

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-14

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-15

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-16

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-17

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

(Push-button ignition models only)

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK

TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is dis-

played in the odometer, one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is

being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will

activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission (M/T)

into R (Reverse), or the Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the Continu-

ously Variable Transmission into P

(Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back

of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to

prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked

up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the rear hatch. Remove the Divide-N-

Hide® floor (if so equipped). For additional infor-

mation, please refer to “Divide-N-Hide® Adjust-

able Floor” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Lift the floorboard.

LCE2142 LCE2083

6-4 In case of emergency

1. Remove the jacking tools from the storage

location.

2. Loosen the bolt 䊊

1counterclockwise to

lower the spare.

3. Stop turning the bolt when the spare is

lowered to the point where the tire basket

䊊

2can be removed from the hook 䊊

4. Remove the wheel basket by pushing the

basket upward.

5. Lower the tire basket to the ground and take

out the spare.

LCE2088

LCE2102

In case of emergency 6-5

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-

sult in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊

as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and jack rod to

prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or

wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

SCE0630 LCE2115

6-6 In case of emergency

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the

correct placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the 2 notches in

the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the

notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the

vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-

move the wheel nuts, and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D) until they are

tight.

SCE0002 WCE0048

In case of emergency 6-7

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to the specific instructions under

the heading “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual

Reinstalling the temporary spare tire to

its original position

After the flat tire is repaired, return the temporary

spare to its original position in the tire basket

under the rear of the vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency

1. Open the hatch.

2. Remove the luggage floor.

3. Loosen bolt 䊊

1counterclockwise approxi-

mately 20 turns using the wheel nut wrench

and wrench extension to lower the tire bas-

ket.

4. Stop turning the bolt when the tire basket is

lowered to a place where it can be removed

from the hook. Do not loosen the bolt

excessively, otherwise the basket may

fall suddenly.

5. Hold the tire basket and remove it from the

hook by pushing the basket 䊊

2upward and

moving the hook 䊊

3to release the basket.

6. Lower the tire basket slowly to the ground

and then put in the temporary spare tire 䊊

LCE2096 LCE2097 LCE2098

In case of emergency 6-9

7. Reinstall the tire basket by pushing upward

on the basket 䊊

5and inserting the hook 䊊

Please be sure that the hook is located as

shown in the image 䊊

7. The hook must

engage from the inside of the basket.

8. Tighten the bolt 䊊

8clockwise until the bolt is

tight using the wheel nut wrench and

wrench extension to move the tire basket up

to the holding position.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire,

tire basket and jacking equipment are

properly secured after use. Such items

can become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

LCE2099 LCE2100 LCE2101

6-10 In case of emergency

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to the specific instructions under

the heading “Wheels and Tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

●When reinstalling the spare tire basket

under the vehicle after use, be sure that

the hook engages the basket from the

inside. If the spare tire basket hook is

not engaged properly, there is an in-

creased risk of the spare tire separating

from the vehicle in a crash and causing

injury.

Stowing the damaged tire

Return the spare tire basket back to its original

position in the reverse order of removal. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Getting the spare

tire and tools” in this section.

Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:

56 ft–lb (75 N•m)

Securely store the jack and tools in the storage

area.

Securely store the damaged tire in the cargo area

as illustrated.

NOTE:

The spare tire basket cannot be used to

store the conventional tire.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after each use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

●Make sure that the spare tire basket is

properly secured in its original position

after removing the spare tire.

●The spare tire and small size spare tire

are designed for emergency use. For

additional information, refer to the spe-

cific instructions under the heading

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

LCE2103

In case of emergency 6-11

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the

battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the 2 vehicles to bring their batter-

ies near each other.

Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission).

Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-

tems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, turn the key off and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

WCE0054

In case of emergency 6-13

CAUTION

●Do not push start this vehicle. The 3-way

catalyst may be damaged.

●Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) and manual transmission models

cannot be push-started or tow-started.

Attempting to do so may cause trans-

mission damage.

●For manual transmission models, never

try to start the vehicle by towing it.

When the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a red

high temperature warning light ), or if you

feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator

cap is removed, pressurized hot water

will spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-14 In case of emergency

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN

dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-

tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service

operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the following

precautions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information about towing your ve-

hicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing” in the “Technical and Consumer

Information” section of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-15

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

䊊

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

䊊

Manual Transmission (M/T)

LCE2231

䊊

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

䊊

Manual Transmission (M/T)

LCE2232

6-16 In case of emergency

CAUTION

●Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models with the front

wheels on the ground or 4 wheels on

the ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expensive

damage to the transmission. If it is nec-

essary to tow the vehicle with the rear

wheels raised always use towing dollies

under the front wheels.

●When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

front wheels on towing dollies, or when

towing manual transmission (M/T)

models with the front wheels on the

ground:

– Turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by turning

the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion. This may damage the steering

lock mechanism (for models

equipped with steering lock

mechanism).

– Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

●When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-

mission (M/T) models with the rear

wheels on the ground (if you do not use

towing dollies): Always release the

parking brake.

●Observe the following restricted towing

speeds and distances for manual trans-

mission (M/T) models only:

– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)

– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

There are two options to recover a stuck vehicle:

pulling and rocking. For additional information,

regarding these options, please refer to the fol-

lowing sections.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal

injury or death when recovering a stuck

vehicle:

●Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

●Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

●Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

●Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use

a tow strap or other device designed specifically

for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions for the recovery device.

In case of emergency 6-17

NOTE:

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing

or vehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

System.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)

and R (Reverse) (M/T models).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (M/T models).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

6-18 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...........7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Floor mats . . ...................................7-4

Seat belts .....................................7-5

Corrosion protection ...............................7-5

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-5

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

●after driving on coastal roads

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid

or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification

sensor. This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front

position.

●Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats

specifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model. For additional information,

see a NISSAN dealer.

●

Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning aid.

For additional information, refer to ⴖFloor

mat positioning aidⴖin this section.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side

only)

This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor

mat brackets to help keep your floor mats in

place. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been

specially designed for your vehicle model. The

driver’s side floor mat has two grommet holes

incorporated in it. Position each mat by placing

the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat

grommet holes while centering the mat in the

floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety –

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

●the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas

●damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

LAI2010

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions ...........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-7

Engine cooling system .............................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-9

Changing engine coolant ........................8-9

Engine oil........................................8-10

Checking engine oil level .......................8-10

Changing engine oil ...........................8-11

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

(if so equipped) ..................................8-12

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..............8-13

Brake fluid ....................................8-13

Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ....................8-13

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-14

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-14

Battery ..........................................8-14

Jump starting .................................8-16

Variable voltage control system.....................8-16

Drive belt ........................................8-17

Spark plugs......................................8-18

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-18

Air cleaner .......................................8-18

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-19

Cleaning .....................................8-19

Replacing ....................................8-19

Brakes ..........................................8-21

Fuses ...........................................8-21

Engine compartment...........................8-22

Passenger compartment .......................8-22

Battery replacement ..............................8-24

Key fob (if so equipped) ........................8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ........8-26

Lights ...........................................8-27

Headlights....................................8-27

Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-28

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-28

Wheels and tires .................................8-31

Tire pressure..................................8-31

Tire labeling...................................8-34

Types of tires..................................8-37

Tire chains....................................8-38

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-

mum maintenance requirements with long ser-

vice intervals to save you both time and money;

however, some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s

good mechanical condition as well as its emis-

sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

TPMS Sensor ID Matching Process After

Tire Rotation (if so equipped) Each TPMS

sensor has a unique identification code. Any time

you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or

more of the TPMS sensors, these identification

codes need to be matched to the new tire/wheel

position to make sure that the low tire pressure

display in the meter is correct. The identification

codes are matched to their positions using a

TPMS diagnostic tool. See a NISSAN dealer for

service.

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components (if so equipped)

Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal,

valve core and cap when the tires are replaced

due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following

items with an “*” is found in this section.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-

tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-

ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism (if so

equipped) On a fairly steep hill check that the

vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P

(Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,

see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to ensure they

operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in

every position. Check that the head

restraints/headrests move up and down

smoothly and the locks hold securely in all

latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid lev-

els* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid

level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the

reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)”in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner (if so equipped) after use is nor-

mal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline

fumes are evident, check for the cause and have

it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For

additional information, refer to the “Appearance

and care” section of this manual.

Windshield–washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. For manual transmission

models, move the shift lever to N (Neu-

tral). For Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models, move the shift

lever to P (Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any parts replacement or

repairs.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and the engine is not running.

To avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before working

near the fan.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●The fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or the transmis-

sion related component harness con-

nector disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HR16DE engine

1. Drive belt location

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Air cleaner

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

reservoir

5. Fusible link

6. Battery

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2377

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and

coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-

gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional information

on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

●Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

●When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling

system.

●The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to

the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of

the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-

duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.

For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

For additional information on the location of the

engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine com-

partment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

LDI2794

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some engine oil be-

tween oil maintenance intervals depending

on the severity of operating conditions or

depending on the property of the engine oil

used. More engine oil is consumed by fre-

quent acceleration/deceleration especially

when the engine rpm is high. Consumption

is likely to be higher when the engine is

new. If the rate of oil consumption, after

driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more

than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), con-

sult a NISSAN dealer

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI2687 LDI2795

ENGINE OIL

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in

this section.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

●Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

●Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊

Band a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug

䊊

Bwith a wrench. Do not use excessive

force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

26 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap 䊊

Asecurely.

For additional information on drain and refill

capacity, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug 䊊

Band oil filter. Correct as

required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

LDI2788

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove

the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the sealing surface of the

engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil .

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

13 ft-lbs (18 N·m)

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine

oil by removing the oil filler cap 䊊

Aif neces-

sary.

CAUTION

●NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in

NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other

fluids.

●Do not use Automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission fluid

in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the

CVT. Damage caused by the use of flu-

ids other than as recommended is not

covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under NISSAN’s

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is

required, we recommend a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

LDI2789

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so

equipped)

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

For additional information on brake fluid specifi-

cation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and clutch

(if so equipped) systems. The use of

improper fluids can damage the brake

and clutch system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊

B, or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN

Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the

MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be added frequently,

the system should be checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The brake

fluid reservoir is shared with the clutch hydraulic

system for manual transmissions. If the level is

below the MIN line 䊊

B, or the brake warning light

comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A.If

fluid must be added frequently, the system should

be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LDI2790 LDI2790

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)

FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Add a washer solvent to the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In the winter

season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate Cleaner

& Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the washer fluid concentrate and

water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

LDI2791

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to electrical

sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After

touching a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

1. Remove the battery vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown.

WDI0701

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill.

3. Reinstall the battery vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

WDI0529

LDI2250

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

The current sensor 䊊

Ais located near the battery

along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-

trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to

ground them to a suitable body ground such as

the frame or engine block area.

1. Water pump pulley

2. Generator pulley

3. Manual tensioner pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position before servicing

drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor

condition, have it replaced or adjusted by a

NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion.

LDI2399

DRIVE BELT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-

gapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer

for assistance.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or others

to be burned. The air cleaner filter not

only cleans the intake air, it also stops

the flame if the engine backfires. If the

air cleaner is not installed and the en-

gine backfires, you could be burned.

Never drive with the air cleaner filter off.

Be cautious working on the engine

when the air cleaner is off.

SDI1895 LDI2708

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, release

the retaining clips 䊊

A, then release the holders at

the back of the unit. Pull the unit upward 䊊

The viscous paper type filter element should not

be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter

according to the maintenance log shown in a

separate maintenance booklet.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of

the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean

if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse

the blades with clear water. If your windshield is

still not clear after cleaning the blades and using

the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow

the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release tab 䊊

3. Move the wiper blade 䊊

Adown and remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

LDI2757

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊

D. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield-washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

Rear window wiper blade

Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replace-

ment is required.

LDI2710

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time

the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type

brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is

applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information regard-

ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriate

maintenance schedule information in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger compartment.

Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the

passenger compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

LDI2385

BRAKES FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links 䊊

Ain the holder. If any of the fusible links are

melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN

parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links, see a

NISSAN dealer.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s side

of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover 䊊

Awith a suit-

able tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the

trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

LDI2792 LDI2712

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

C, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

remove the extended storage switch and check

for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for

long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-

tended storage switch is broken it is not

necessary to replace it. Replace only the

open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be

sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF

position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊

Aand 䊊

Bfound on

each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the

fuse box 䊊

LDI2713 LDI2747

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

KEY FOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:

1. Remove the screw 䊊

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner 䊊

Band twist it to separate the upper

part from the lower part. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the case 䊊

Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.

4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for

replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The key fob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

SDI2134A

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●The operational range of the key fob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

LDI2001

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so

equipped)

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

Ainto

the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it to sepa-

rate the upper part from the lower part. Place

a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the

casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊

and 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for

replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

LDI2637

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

They can be replaced from inside the engine

compartment without removing the headlight as-

sembly.

CAUTION

●High-pressure halogen gas is sealed in-

side the bulb. The bulb may break if the

glass envelope is scratched or the bulb

is dropped.

●Aiming should not be necessary after

replacing the bulb. When aiming adjust-

ment is necessary, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

●Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance. Remove the

bulb from the headlight assembly just

before a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the

rear end of the bulb.

3. Rotate the retaining pin counterclockwise to

loosen it.

4. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or

rotate the bulb when removing it.

5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of

removal.

LDI2240

LIGHTS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, mois-

ture and smoke may enter the fog light

body and affect the performance of the

fog light.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly

High/low/daytime running light (Canada only) 65/55 HB5

Turn/position 28/8 3457 AK

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light (if so equipped)* 55 H11

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

Map light 5 W5W

Room light 8 12V 8W T10x31

Cargo light* 5 W5W

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light*

Turn signal light 21 WY21W

Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W

Backup (reversing) 21 W21W

License plate light* 5 W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*If replacement is required contact a NISSAN dealer.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Fog light (if so equipped)

2. Headlight assembly

3. Map light

4. Room light

5. Door mirror turn signal light

(if so equipped)

6. Rear combination light

7. High-mounted stop light

8. Cargo light

9. License plate light

LDI2796

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp

and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth to protect the housing.

SDI1805

Room light

SDI1499A

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Use a cloth to protect the housing.

If you have a flat tire, refer “Flat tire” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (if so equipped)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE

PRES (pressure) warning message dis-

plays in the odometer, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low

tire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section, and “Flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

Map lights

LDI2044

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert (if so

equipped) provides visual and audible

signals outside the vehicle for inflating

tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. For additional information, refer

to “TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond this

capacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also

result in failure of other vehicle

components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire and loading information label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section.

䊊

3Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2007

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front Original Tire:

P185/65R15

P195/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Rear Original Tire:

P185/65R15

P195/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

T125/70D15 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester

and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

Example

LDI2786

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS (if so

equipped).

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so may

result in a circumference difference be-

tween tires on the front and rear axles

which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system (if so equipped) to

malfunction resulting in personal injury

or death, excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission and differen-

tial gears.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tires. Other types may

damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-

sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may

be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-

mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replac-

ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

TPMS Sensor ID Matching Process

After Tire Rotation (if so equipped)

Each TPMS sensor has a unique identifi-

cation code. Any time you rotate your

vehicle’s tires or replace one or more of

the TPMS sensors, these identification

codes need to be matched to the new

tire/wheel position to make sure that the

low tire pressure display in the meter is

correct. The identification codes are

matched to their positions using a TPMS

diagnostic tool. See a NISSAN dealer for

service.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

WDI0259

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system (if so equipped),

ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-

ance, tire chain clearance, speedometer

calibration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may lead

to accidents and could result in serious

personal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system (if so equipped) and/or in-

terference with the brake discs/drums.

Such interference can lead to de-

creased braking efficiency and/or early

brake pad/shoe wear. For additional in-

formation on wheel off-set dimensions,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for tire re-

placement and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS (if so

equipped).

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at

speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use

tire chains only on the front (original)

tires.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate

than the standard tire. Replace the

spare tire as soon as the tread wear

indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities .......9-2

Recommended fuel .............................9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............................9-7

Specifications.....................................9-8

Engine ........................................9-8

Wheels and tires ...............................9-9

Dimensions and weights ........................9-9

When traveling or registering in another country......9-10

Vehicle identification ..............................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .........9-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ..............................9-10

Engine serial number...........................9-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-11

Emission control information label ...............9-11

Tire and loading information label................9-12

Air conditioner specification label................9-12

Installing front license plate ........................9-13

Vehicle loading information ........................9-13

Terms ........................................9-13

Determining vehicle load capacity . . .............9-14

Loading tips ..................................9-16

Measurement of weights .......................9-16

Towing a trailer ...................................9-17

Flat towing....................................9-17

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-17

Emission control system warranty ..................9-18

Reporting safety defects ..........................9-19

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-20

Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-20

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-21

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 10-7/8 gal 9 gal 41 L • For additional information, refer to “Recommended fuel” in this section of

the manual.

Engine oil Drain and refill • For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in this section of the manual.

HR16DE

With oil filter

change 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.5 L

• Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 10W-30 conventional

petroleum based oil may be used and meet all specifications and require-

ments necessary to maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Without oil

filter change 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt 3.2 L

Cooling system M/T With reservoir 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal 6.7 L • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Cooling system CVT With reservoir 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.3 L • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Manual transmission gear oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, or

equivalent.

• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not available,

API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary

replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid

HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid ———

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 ONLY in

NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not

equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT.

Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not

covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — — • Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in mainland

U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations” in this section of the manual.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations” in this section of the manual.

Windshield-washer fluid 7/8 gal 3/4 gal 3.5 L • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze

or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 9-3

RECOMMENDED FUEL

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle

limited warranty.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15

fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-

ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-

mends the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

LTI2061

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide” for the mainte-

nance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C

system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ENGINE

Model HR16DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 97.51 (1,598)

Firing order 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum and steel 15 x 5.5J 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 16 x 6.0J 1.77 (45)

Tire size P185/65R15

P195/55R16

Spare tire T125/70D15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: in (mm)

Overall length

Without front license plate

bracket 163.9 (4,164)

With front license plate bracket 164.4 (4,175)

Overall width 66.7 (1,695)

Overall height 60.5 (1,537)

Front Track

185/65R15 58.3 (1,480)

195/55R16 57.9 (1,470)

Rear Track

185/65R15 58.5 (1,485)

195/55R16 58.1 (1,475)

Wheelbase 102.4 (2,600)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.

S.S. certification label” on the cen-

ter pillar between the driver’s side

front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion and registration are the responsibility

of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

LTI2050 LTI2066

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),

etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

HR16DE engine

LTI2020 WTI0172 LTI2004

Technical and consumer information 9-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information Label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed as

shown.

LTI0197 LTI2067

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Before mounting the license plate, confirm the

following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag:

– License plate bracket

– License plate bracket screws x2

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

1. Hold the license plate bracket and mount the

license plate bracket using the two screws

to the facia.

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

LTI2069

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-13

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD

CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is deter-

mined by weight, not by available cargo

space. For example, a luggage rack, bike

carrier, cartop carrier or similar equipment

does not increase load carrying capacity

of your vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by us-

ing a commercial-grade scale, found at

places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry,

grain elevator, or a scrap metal recycling

facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your

vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to

the GVWR specified for your vehicle

to determine how much more weight

your vehicle can carry.

3. After loading (cargo and passen-

gers), re-weigh your vehicle to deter-

mine if either GVWR or GAWR for

your vehicle is exceeded. If GVWR is

exceeded, remove cargo as neces-

sary. If either the front or rear GAWR

is exceeded, shift the load or remove

cargo as necessary.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

WTI0169

Technical and consumer information 9-15

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Mea-

surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the Tire and Loading Information label.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur,

or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle

with the front tires on the ground. Doing

so may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

●DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-

ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-

sion parts due to lack of transmission

lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)

●Always tow with the manual transmission in

N (Neutral).

●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in N

(Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the

engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of

towing may cause damage to internal trans-

mission parts.

Continuously Variable Transmission (if

so equipped)

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously

variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s

drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-

turer’s recommendations when using their prod-

uct.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-17

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

9-18 Technical and consumer information

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division

toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may

also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink

after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the

“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for

testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory-

trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-

ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model

year and prior, please contact your nearest

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the

NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122

and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist

you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-21

MEMO

9-22 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........5-27

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system).....................1-43

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-50

Side and curtain

(See supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system) ........1-57

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-60, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ..........4-28

Air conditioner service ...........4-33

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .............9-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ..............9-7

Heater and air conditioner controls ....4-25

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-33

Airflowcharts..................4-29

Anchor point locations .............1-27

Antenna .....................4-76

Antifreeze ....................5-31

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-27

Apps .......................4-76

Armrests .....................1-5

Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Audible reminders ...............2-20

Audio system ..................4-33

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-71, 4-72

Bluetooth® streaming audio ........4-72

Compact disc (CD)

player . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-54, 4-61

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-46

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-42

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player.................4-51,4-56

FM radio reception. . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-47

iPod® Player .............4-66,4-68

iPod® player operation .......4-66,4-68

Radio ....................4-33

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-74

USB interface ............4-62,4-64

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port..................4-62,4-64

Automatic

Automatic power window switch .....2-39

Automatic transmission position indicator

light.....................2-18

Automatic door locks ..............3-7

AUXjack..............4-45,4-47,4-62

Battery ..................5-31,8-14

Charge warning light ............2-14

Battery replacement

Keyfob................8-24,8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key®..........8-26

Before starting the engine ...........5-13

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-17

Block heater

Engine ....................5-32

Bluetooth® audio ............4-71,4-72

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-93, 4-104

Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation

System .....................4-72

Boosterseats..................1-39

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-27

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28

Brake system ................5-26

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-21

Parking brake operation ..........5-20

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21

Brake fluid ....................8-13

Brakes ......................8-21

Brake system ..................5-26

Break-inschedule ...............5-23

Brightness/contrast button ...........4-9

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-26

Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-13

lbreplacement................8-28

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. .9-2

Cargocover...................2-34

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .9-13

Car phone or CB radio .............4-77

CD care and cleaning ..............4-74

CD player

(See audio system) . . . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-54, 4-61

Checkingbulbs .................2-13

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-20, 1-20, 1-22, 1-24

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System ..............1-24

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27

Child restraint with top tether strap.......1-26

Child safety rear door lock ............3-7

Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-20

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Clock.......................4-43

(models without navigation

system) . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-43, 4-49, 4-53

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-43, 4-49, 4-53

Clock set/adjustment ..............4-47

Clock setting

(models with Navigation System) ......4-4,4-7

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System) . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-43, 4-49, 4-52, 4-53

Clutch

Clutch fluid ..................8-13

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-11

Cold weather driving...............5-31

Compact disc (CD)

player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-54, 4-61

Connect phone .................4-77

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-14

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-12

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-14

Control panel buttons ...............4-4

Brightness/contrast button ..........4-9

Enterbutton..................4-4

Setting button .............4-7,4-47

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).......4-74

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-25

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Checking engine coolant level ........8-9

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-8

Corrosion protection ...............7-5

Cruisecontrol..................5-21

Cupholders...................2-32

Curtain side-impact air bag system

(See supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system)...........1-57

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-26

Defroster switch

Rear window defroster switch .......2-24

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-26

Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4

Door locks .....................3-5

Door open warning light.............2-14

Doors........................3-5

Drive belt .....................8-17

Driving

Cold weather driving.............5-31

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-14

Driving with manual transmission ......5-18

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Driving the vehicle ................5-14

Economy-fuel..................5-24

Emergency engine shutoff............5-12

Emission control information label .......9-11

Emission control system warranty .......9-18

Engine

Before starting the engine..........5-13

ockheater.................5-32

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-9

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine coolant level ........8-9

Checking engine oil level ..........8-10

Engine compartment check locations ....8-7

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-8

Engine cooling system ............8-8

Engineoil...................8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-14

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6

Engine serial number ............9-11

10-2

Engine specifications .............9-8

Starting the engine .............5-13

Engine coolant temperature gauge .......2-8

Enterbutton....................4-4

Event data recorders ..............9-20

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2

Explanation of maintenance items ........8-2

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2

Flat tire .......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Clutchfluid..................8-13

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-12

Engine coolant.................8-8

Engine oil ...................8-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-11

Foglightswitch.................2-28

Front air bag system (See supplemental

restraint system) .................1-50

Frontseats.....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-24

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-26

Fuel gauge ...................2-9

Fuel octane rating ...............9-5

Fuel recommendation .............9-4

Loose fuel cap warning ........2-6,3-27

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System

Tirepressure.................8-31

Fuel-filler door ..................3-26

Fuelgauge.....................2-9

Fuses.......................8-21

Fusiblelinks ...................8-22

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-8

Fuel gauge ...................2-9

Odometer ...................2-5

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-7

Trip computer ................2-10

Trip odometer .................2-5

General maintenance ...............8-2

Glovebox.....................2-34

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-93, 4-104

Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-25

Headlight control switch ............2-25

Headlights ....................8-27

Head restraints ..................1-6

Heated seats ...................2-29

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-25

Heater operation ...............4-27

Hoodrelease...................3-24

Horn .......................2-28

Ignition switch ...................5-8

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch ........5-10

Immobilizer system. . . . . . .2-21, 3-4, 5-9, 5-13

Important vehicle information label .......9-11

Increasing fuel economy.............

-24

Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator...................5-12

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Instrument brightness control ..........2-26

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-26

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range .............3-13

Key operation ................3-14

Mechanical key ................3-4

Remote keyless entry operation.......3-18

Troubleshooting guide............3-23

Warning signals ...............3-23

Interior light....................2-40

iPod®Player...............4-66, 4-68

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-24

10-3

Jump starting ...............6-12,8-16

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement .......8-24,8-24

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-18

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......3-3,3-11

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-11

Emission control information label . . . . .9-11

Engine serial number ............9-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-11

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .....9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-59

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-24

License plate

Installing the license plate ..........9-13

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-28

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-13

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Charge warning light ............2-14

Exterior and Interior lights ..........8-28

Foglights...................8-28

Foglightswitch...............2-28

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-25

Headlight control switch ..........2-25

Headlights..................8-27

Interiorlight..................2-40

Lightbulbs..................8-27

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-16

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52

Security indicator light............2-19

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders............2-12,2-13,2-18

Lights.......................8-27

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Door locks ...................3-5

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-26

Power door locks ...............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning ..........2-6,3-27

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-16

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13

Maintenance

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Insidethevehicle...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Outside the vehicle ..............8-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-19

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Maintenance requirements ............8-2

Malfunction indicator light ............2-18

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-3

Manual windows .................2-39

Mappocket....................2-31

Meters and gauges ................2-3

Instrument brightness control ........2-26

Mirror

Outside mirror control ............3-31

Outside mirrors ...............3-31

Rearview ...................3-30

Vanity mirror .................3-30

Mirrors ......................

-30

Mobileapps...................4-76

NissanConnect

................4-76

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........3-3,3-11

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator.....................5-12

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System .............2-21,3-4,5-9,5-13

NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-112

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-5

Odometer .....................2-5

10-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................9-2

Changing engine oil .............8-11

Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12

Checking engine oil level ..........8-10

Engine oil ...................8-10

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-6

One shot call . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-96, 4-106

Outside mirror control ..............3-31

Outside mirrors .................3-31

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . .6-14

Owner’s manual order form ...........9-21

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ....................9-21

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-20

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-25

Parking brake...................5-20

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system...............4-78,4-93,4-104

Power

Power door locks ...............3-6

Power outlet .................2-30

Power rear windows .............2-39

Power steering system ...........5-26

Power windows ...............2-37

Rear power windows ............2-39

Power outlet ...................2-30

Power steering ..................5-26

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Precautions on booster

seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-10

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-43

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-47

Push starting ...................6-14

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-77

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-42

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-46

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player .................4-51,4-56

Steering wheel audio control switch ....4-74

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test........................9-20

Rear center seat belt ..............1-16

Rear power windows ..............2-39

Rearseat......................1-4

Rearview mirror .................3-30

RearView Monitor .............4-10,4-11

Rear window defroster switch .........2-24

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-23

Recommended Fluids ...............9-2

Recorders

Eventdata..................9-20

Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-7

Registering a vehicle in another country ....9-10

Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-19

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40

Reporting safety defects (US only) .....

-19

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-3

Rear seat adjustment .............1-4

Seatbackpockets................2-31

Seat belt

Child safety..................1-20

Infants and small children ..........1-20

Injured Person ................1-13

Largerchildren................1-21

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-10

Pregnant women...............1-13

Rear center seat belt ............1-16

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seatbelts...................1-10

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-18

Three-point type with retractor .......1-13

Seat belt extenders ...............1-19

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17

Seats

Adjustment...................1-2

Armrests....................1-5

Frontseats...................1-2

10-5

Heatedseats.................2-29

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-3

Rear seat....................1-4

Seats/floor mats ..................7-4

Security indicator light..............2-19

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start . . . . .2-21, 3-4, 5-9, 5-13

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21

Service manual order form ...........9-21

Servicing air conditioner.............4-33

Setting button ...............4-7,4-47

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-15

Manual transmission .............5-19

Shift lever lock release..............5-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-18

Side air bag system (See supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag system) .1-57

Smartphone connectivity ............4-76

Spark plug replacement .............8-18

Spark plugs ...................8-18

Specifications ...................9-8

Speedometer ...................2-4

SRS warning label ................1-59

Stability control .................5-28

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-13

Jump starting .............6-12,8-16

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Push starting .................6-14

Starting the engine .............5-13

Starting the engine ...............5-13

Steering

Power steering system ...........5-26

Tilting steering wheel ............3-29

Steeringwheel..................3-29

Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-74

Stoplight.....................8-28

Storage......................2-31

Storage tray ...................2-32

Sun visors ....................3-29

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-59

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-60, 2-17

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-59

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-43

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-43

Supplemental side and curtain side-impact air bag

system ......................1-57

Switch

Automatic power window switch ......2-39

Foglightswitch...............2-28

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-25

Headlight control switch ..........2-25

Ignition switch .................5-8

Instrument brightness control ........2-26

Power door lock switch ............3-6

Rear window defroster switch .......2-24

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-23

Turn signal switch ..............2-27

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-30

Tachometer ....................2-7

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-8

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start...........2-21,3-4,5-9,5-13

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

Tie down hooks .................2-36

Tilting steering wheel ..............3-29

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ................6-4,8-41

Tire and Loading Information label .....9-12

Tire chains ..................8-38

Tire placard..................9-12

Tire pressure .................8-31

Tire rotation..................8-38

Types of tires .................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading .........9-17

Wheels and tires ............8-31,9-9

Wheel/tire size.................9-9

Tirepressure...................8-31

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....5-3

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-26

Towing

Flattowing..................9-17

Towtrucktowing...............6-15

Trailer towing .................9-17

Towing a trailer ..................9-17

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-12

10-6

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-14

Driving with manual transmission ......5-18

Transmission shift lever lock release ......5-17

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country)......................9-10

Trip computer ..................2-10

Trip odometer ...................2-5

Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice recognition

system) .....................4-116

Turn signal switch ................2-27

Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-17

USB interface ...............4-62,4-64

Audio file operation ..........4-63,4-65

Vanity mirror ...................3-30

Variable voltage control system .........8-17

Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-30

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-28

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ....5-28

Vehicle identification...............9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .......9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ................9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate....9-10

Vehicle immobilizer system . .2-21, 3-4, 5-9, 5-13

Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . .9-13, 9-14

Vehicle recovery .................6-17

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine

start ...............2-21,3-4,5-9,5-13

Ventilators ....................4-24

Visors.......................3-29

Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . .4-82, 4-96, 4-106

Voice recognition system ...........4-112

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17

Battery charge warning light ........2-14

Brake warning light .............2-13

Door open warning light...........2-14

Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-14

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Loose fuel cap warning ........2-6,3-27

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-14

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-16

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17

Supplemental air bag warning

light ..................1-60,2-17

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders. . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-59

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Audible reminders . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Checking bulbs ...............2-13

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Warning lights . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-13, 2-18

Warning lights ...........2-12,2-13,2-18

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders.....................2-12

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-23

Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-9

Wheels and tires ..............8-31,9-9

Wheel/tire size...................9-9

When traveling or registering in another

country ......................9-10

Windows .....................2-37

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-39

Manual windows ...............2-39

Power rear windows .............2-39

Power windows ...............2-37

Rear power windows ............

-39

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-23

Wiperblades.................8-19

Wiper and washer switch ............2-22

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

●Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent

●Engine oil with API Certification Mark

●Viscosity SAE 5W-30

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and

oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

For additional information, refer to the Tire and

loading information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Nissan 2016 Versa Note Owners Manual | Owner's USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation